Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 236

For Personal Computer

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

B-66102E/10

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country
from where the product is exported.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/07 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
s–1 inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 PREFACE

PREFACE

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :


Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 0–MODEL A, B, C 0–A/B/C Series 0–A/B/C
Series 0
FANUC Series 0i–MODEL A 0i–A Series 0i–A
FANUC Series 15–MODEL A 15–A
Series 15–A
FANUC Series 150–MODEL A 150–A
FANUC Series 15–MODEL B 15–B
Series 15–B Series 15
FANUC Series 150–MODEL B 150–B
FANUC Series 15i–MA 15i–MA
Series 15i–A
FANUC Series 150i–MA 150i–MA
FANUC Series 16–MODEL A 16–A Series 16–A
FANUC Series 16–MODEL B 16–B
Series 16–B
FANUC Series 160–MODEL B 160–B
FANUC Series 16–MODEL C 16–C
Series 16–C
FANUC Series 160–MODEL C 160–C Series 16
FANUC Series 16i–A 16i–A
Series 16i–A
FANUC Series 160i–A 160i–A
FANUC Series 16i–B 16i–B
Series 16i–B
FANUC Series 160i–B 160i–B
FANUC Series 18–MODEL A 18–A Series 18–A
FANUC Series 18–MODEL B 18–B
Series 18–B
FANUC Series 180–MODEL B 180–B
FANUC Series 18–MODEL C 18–C
Series 18–C
FANUC Series 180–MODEL C 180–C Series 18
FANUC Series 18i–A 18i–A
Series 18i–A
FANUC Series 180i–A 180i–A
FANUC Series 18i–B 18i–B
Series 18i–B
FANUC Series 180i–B 180i–B
FANUC Series 20 Series 20
Series 20
FANUC Series 20i Series 20i

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
p–1 inform us,we will delete
PREFACE B–66102E/10

Product Name Abbreviations


FANUC Series 21–TA 21–TA Series 21–A
FANUC Series 21–TB 21–TB *1
FANUC Series 210–TB 210–TB
Series 21–B
FANUC Series 21–MB 21–MB
FANUC Series 210–MB 210–MB Series 21
FANUC Series 21i–A 21i–A
Series 21i–A
FANUC Series 210i–A 210i–A
FANUC Series 21i–B 21i–B
Series 21i–B
FANUC Series 210i–B 210i–B

*1 The Series 21–TB is available in two models: control unit A and


control unit B. The manual may refer to these models as the
21–TB (controller A) or 21–TB (controller B) in those cases
where their functions differ.

Other manufacturers’ : IBM and PC–DOS are registered trademarks of International


products referred to in Business Machines Corporation.
this manual : MS–DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft corporation.
All other product names identified throughout this manual are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
p–2 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6


3.1 INSTALLING THE SYSTEM FROM THE FANUC MACRO
COMPILER SYSTEM FLOPPY DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 INSTALLING THE EXECUTOR FILE FROM THE FANUC
MACRO LIBRARY FLOPPY DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.3 PATH SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.4 COMPILER SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.5 SPECIFYING ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.5.1 Selecting a RS–232–C/GPIB Interface Control System (MDEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.5.2 Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination (MTMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

4. FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.1 MACRO COMPILER (MCOMP0/MCOMP15/MCOMP15I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2 MACRO LINKER (MLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.3 ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (CNC) (FOR SERIES 16/18/20/21T–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.4 ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER
(FANUC PMC WRITER/FANUC FA WRITER) (FOR SERIES 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) . . . . . . . . . 23
4.5 SERIAL INTERFACE UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.5.1 Macro Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.5.2 Macro Program Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.6 ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC FA WRITER, GP–IB INTERFACE)
(FOR SERIES 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.7 CONVERSION TO A MEMORY CARD FORMAT (MMCARD) (THIS FUNCTION IS
USED IN THE SERIES 15–B/16–B/16–C/18–B/18–C/20/21–B/16i–A/18i–A/21i–A/
16i–B/18i–B/21i–B/0i–A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

6. RS–232–C INTERFACE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

7. GP–IB INTERFACE SETTING (FOR SERIES 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) . . . . . . . . . . 34

8. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

9. HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
c–1
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Table of Contents B–66102E/10

APPENDIX
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) . 39

B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

C. ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE


FOR THE FANUC SERIES 16/18 SUPER CAP M/SUPER CAP II M . . . . . . . . . . 79
E.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
E.2 MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
E.2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
E.2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
E.2.3 Source File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
E.2.4 Table Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
E.2.5 Table Conversion List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
E.3 CONVERSION OF TABLE DATA WITH THE MACRO LINKER (MLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
E.3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
E.3.2 Link Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
E.3.3 Link List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/


SUPER CAP II T WITH SERIES 16i/18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
F.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
F.2 DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
F.3 CAP CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
F.4 USER MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
F.4.1 Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
F.4.2 Developing a User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
F.4.3 Transferring the User Module to F–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
F.4.4 Executing the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
F.4.5 Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
F.5 RESTRICTIONS IMPOSED ON THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
F.6 CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
F.6.1 Creating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
F.6.2 Creating Link Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
F.7 CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
F.7.1 Creating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
F.7.2 Creating Link Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 97


G.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
G.1.1 Starting the BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
G.1.2 System File and User File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
G.2 OPERATION AND CORRESPONDING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
G.2.1 System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
G.2.2 System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
c–2
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 Table of Contents

G.2.3 System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106


G.2.4 System Data Save Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
G.2.5 SRAM Data Backup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
G.2.6 Memory Card File Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
G.2.7 Memory Card Format Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
G.2.8 End of Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
G.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
G.4 SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
G.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
G.4.2 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
G.4.3 Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
G.4.4 Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
G.5 FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
G.5.1 Determining the Cause of the No–space State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 16i/18i/21i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122


H.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
H.1.1 Starting the Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
H.1.2 System Files and User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
H.1.3 Boot Slot Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
H.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
H.2.1 System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
H.2.2 System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
H.2.3 System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
H.2.4 System Data Save Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
H.2.5 SRAM Data Backup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
H.2.6 Memory Card File Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
H.2.7 Memory Card Format Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
H.2.8 Load Basic System Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
H.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR SERIES 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA,


SERIES 16i/18i/21i–A/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
I.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
I.2 PROCESSING BY P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
I.2.1 Starting the P-code Loader Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
I.2.2 RAM Initialization Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
I.2.3 Loading Start Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
I.2.4 Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
I.2.5 Loading End Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
I.2.6 Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
I.2.7 Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
I.2.8 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
I.3 PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
I.4 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

J. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160


J.1 IPL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
J.2 PROCESSING FLOW FOR THE P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
J.2.1 RAM Initializing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
J.2.2 Loading Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
J.2.3 Loading Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
c–3
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Table of Contents B–66102E/10

J.2.4 Loading End Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164


J.2.5 Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
J.2.6 Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
J.2.7 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
J.3 PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
J.4 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 15–B/15i–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173


K.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
K.2 MEMORY CARD SPECIFICATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
K.3 STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
K.4 REGISTERING A MEM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A MEMORY CARD, INTO F–ROM . . 178
K.5 SAVING A MEM–FORMAT FILE FROM F–ROM TO A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
K.6 REGISTERING A ROM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A ROM CASSETTE, INTO F–ROM . . 184
K.7 TYPES OF FILES IN F–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

M. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
M.1 SERIES 15i COMPILE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
M.2 PARAMETERS OTHER THAN SERIES 15i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
M.2.1 Compile Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
M.2.2 Executer Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

N. SUPER CAP T/SUPER CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212


N.1 SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
N.2 COMPILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
N.3 LINKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
N.4 WRITE TO THE MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
N.5 LOADING TO FLASH ROM MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
c–4
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 1. GENERAL

1 GENERAL

The MACRO Compiler/Executor function stores programs created using


custom macros (macro programs) in ROM so that machine tool builders
can implement their own conversational screens.
The FANUC MACRO Compiler is a macro compiler utility to implement
the MACRO Compiler/Executor function on personal computers
available on the market.
The FANUC MACRO Compiler is applicable to the following CNC
systems:
1) Series 0
2) Series 15
3) Series 16
4) Series 18
5) Series 20
6) Series 21
This manual describes the procedure to store macro programs in ROM by
using the macro compiler utility. For the syntax rule for creating macro
programs, refer to the manuals listed below.
1) FANUC Series 0/0-Mate Programming Manual (Macro
compiler/Macro executor) (B-61393E-1)
2) FANUC Series 15 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro
executor) (B-61213E-1)
3) FANUC Series 15–MODEL B Programming Manual (Macro
Compiler/Macro executor) (B–62073E–2)
4) FANUC Series 0i/16/18/20/21 Programming Manual (Macro
compiler/Macro executor) (B-61803E-1)
5) FANUC Series 15i–MODEL A Programming Manual (Macro
Compiler/Macro executor) (B–63323EN–2)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
1 inform us,we will delete
1. GENERAL B–66102E/10

1.1
FEATURES (1) Macro programs can be edited using a commercially available screen
editor that operates under the MS-DOS environment.
(2) The symbolic macro compiler function allows macro programs to be
coded in symbolic format, and also allows comments to be coded.
(3) A program that references macro variables in array format can be
created.
(4) Compile list output makes macro program development, debugging,
and maintenance much easier.
(5) A linker (linkage editing) function is employed which allows partial
compilation and also facilitates the development and maintenance of
macro programs common to several models.
(6) The macro compiler utility, used with the CNC executor RAM
operation function, can transfer a ROM-format file to the CNC
system. This capability allows macro programs to be developed and
debugged without writing ROM.
(7) Linker output (ROM-format file) operation is separated from writing
to a macro ROM by the ROM file transmitter with the FANUC
PMC-Writer/FA-Writer. With this feature, the same macro ROM can
be created at any time by preserving ROM-format files.
(8) A ROM file transmitter function based on the GP-IB interface allows
connection to the FANUC FA Writer for high-speed writing to a
macro ROM verification.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
2 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 1. GENERAL

1.2
OVERVIEW The FANUC MACRO Compiler/Executor function enables the FANUC
CNC users to develop their own macro programs in a macro language,
store the macro programs in ROM as a macro ROM by using the macro
compiler, and execute the macro programs with the macro executor
function of the FANUC CNC systems. (See the conceptual diagram on
the next page.)
The macro compiler utility enables macro program development,
compilation, and writing to a macro ROM on a personal computer
operating under the MS-DOS or PC-DOS.
The macro compiler utility functions are listed below.
(1) Macro compiler
D Symbolic macro program analysis
D Macro program compilation
D Object program output
D Reference list/compile list output
(2) Macro linker
D Linkage editing of specified object programs and macro
executor/compile parameters
D ROM-format file output
D Link list output
(3) ROM file transmitter (CNC)
D ROM-format file transfer to the CNC
D Macro executor RAM operation
(4) ROM file transmitter (FANUC PMC Writer/FANUC FA Writer)
D Writing ROM-format files to a macro cassette
D Verifying a macro cassette against the ROM-format files
(5) Serial interface utility
D Reading/transferring programs from the CNC/FANUC SYSTEM P
(6) ROM file transmitter (FANUC FA Writer (GP-IB interface)
D Writing ROM-format files to a macro cassette
D Verifying a macro cassette against the ROM-format files
(7) Memory card format conversion
D Converting macro programs to a format capable of accepting write
from a memory card
The macro compiler utility is distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) floppy disk
as an MS-DOS/PC-DOS package utility.
The utility does not provide functions such as those for editing macro
programs, and saving and restoring programs to and from floppy disks.
For these functions, use MS-DOS/PC-DOS commands and editors
available on the market.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
3 inform us,we will delete
1. GENERAL B–66102E/10

* Create a macro program using an editor. (An editor is


MS-DOS not supplied.)
Editor

* The macro program (source file) must be in standard


Macro Program MS-DOS text format.
(Source file)

MCOMP0
MCOMP15
MCOMP15I
* The macro compiler generates an object file. It also
MACRO creates reference and compile lists at the same time
Compiler as the object file.

(xx.LNK) (xx.REL)
* The object file is linked based on a link control file to
LINK Macro Pro- generate a ROM-format file. The editor creates the
Control gram (Obj file) link control file (xx.MEX).
file

MLINK
MLINK15I
* FANUC supplies a macro library for each CNC
MACRO model.
Macro Library
Linker file

(xx.ROM)
* The ROM-format file contains macros in binary form
output by the linker for a macro cassette.
ROM format file

MROMWT MMCARD
/MROMVF MMCARD15 * The ROM format file is executed on the CNC
MTRNSC
MMCARD15I using the following methods:

ROM file Memory Card file · The file is transferred to CNC through
Transmitter Converter RS-232-C to execute RAM operation (Series
16/18/20/21-TA).
· The file is transferred to FANUC PMC Writer/
FA Writer, written in macro cassetter or ROM,
RS-232-C RS-232-C line (xx.MEM) then executed (Series 0/15-A/16-A/18-A).
line GP-IB I/F
· The file is converted in Memory card format,
transferred to CNC from memory card, then
CNC FANUC Memory Card executed (Series 15-B/16-B/18-B/16-C/18-C
PMC Writer Reader /20/21–B/15i–A/16i–A/18i–A/21i–A/16i–B/
Series 18i–B/21i–B).
16/18/20/21-TA FA Writer /Writer
RAM Operation

Macro Memory
cassette Card

Fig.1.2 MACRO Compiler Utility Function Conceptual Diagram

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
4 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 2. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

2 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

(1) Personal computer: (Fujitsu : FMR Series)


(NEC : PC98 Series)
(IBM : PC-AT Series)

Main memory 640K bytes or more


OS (FMR/PC98) MS-DOS Version 3.1 and later
(PC-AT) PC-DOS Version 3.3 and later
Hard disk About 1M bytes is required for install the system
(Caution 1)
Floppy disk drive 5-inch floppy disk drive (2HD) 3.5-inch floppy disk
drive (2HD) for 15i/16i/18i/21i (Caution 2)
Serial interface RS-232-C serial interface
Miscellaneous Printer (Note 1)
(Option) GP-IB interface (Note 2)

(2) FANUC PMC-Writer or FANUC FA-Writer


Serial interface (RS-232-C)
GP-IB interface (option/FANUC FA-Writer only)

CAUTION
1 The macro compiler utility software is installed on hard disk.
This software occupies a hard disk space of about 1M bytes.
In addition, developed macro programs and list files/object
files generated at compile time are output as files on hard
disk. So the size of hard disk depends on the macro
programs developed.
2 The macro compiler utility software is distributed with a
5-inch (2HD) or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series
15i/16i/18i/21i floppy disk. The macro executor is also
distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk
for series 15i/16i/18i/21i floppy disk. A 5-inch or 3.5-inch
floppy disk drive is needed to install the system and
executor files.

NOTE
1 The macro compiler and macro linker output a reference list,
compile list, and link list as MS-DOS text files to hard disk.
For output to the printer, use an MS-DOS/PC-DOS
command.
Text files are output in a format assuming an 80-character,
60-line printer.
2 The FANUC FA-Writer allows high-speed writing to
ROM/verification based on the GP-IB interface. (Note that
only NEC PC98 Series and IBM PC-AT Sereis currently
supports this function.)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
5 inform us,we will delete
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) B–66102E/10

3 SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

The FANUC MACRO Compiler software is distributed with two 5-inch


(2HD) floppy disks or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series
15i/16i/18i/21i. To use the software, load the software to the hard disk
from the system floppy disks.
No. Name
1 FANUC MACRO Compiler system floppy disk
2 FANUC MACRO Library system floppy disk

To install the system, some knowledge of the hardware and software of


a personal computer to be used is needed. In particular, the user should
be familiar with the handling of basic MS-DO/PC-DOS commands and
files such as CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
6 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

3.1 This operation installs the FANUC MACRO Compiler system software
on the hard disk. First set the FANUC MACRO Compiler system floppy
INSTALLING THE disk in the floppy disk drive, then activate MSETUP.BAT on the floppy
SYSTEM FROM THE disk.
FANUC MACRO > ?: \ > MSETUP <in> <out>
COMPILER SYSTEM ? : : The root directory of the system floppy disk contains
MSETUP.BAT.
FLOPPY DISK <in> : Specify the name of the drive containing the system floppy
disk.
<out> : Specify the drive name of the hard disk to hold the system.

Examples The system floppy disk is set in drive B:, and the system is installed on
the hard disk of drive A:.
> B: \ > MSETUP B: A:
This operation creates the following directories in drive A:, and the
system software and a sample program are copied to the hard disk.

A:\MCOMP \TOOL

\MEX

\USR \SAMPL

Explanation of the
directories a) \MCOMP\TOOL
The FANUC MACRO Compiler system software, batch files,
document files, and so forth are stored under this directory.
MCOMP0.EXE/MCOMP15.EXE/MLINK.EXE/
!System software
RSFMR.BAT
!RS-232-C setting batch file for Fujitsu FMR Series
RSPC98.BAT
!RS-232-C setting batch file for NEC PC98 Series
RSPCAT.BAT
!RS-232-C setting batch file for IBM PC-AT Series
SYSTEM.DEF
!System common symbol definition file (for $INCLUDE)
b) \MCOMP\MEX
Library file is stored under this directory.
This file is loaded from the FANUC MACRO Library floppy
disk.
c) \MCOMP\USR
Under this directory, create directories used to develop macro
programs.

A:\MCOMP \TOOL

\MEX

\USR \SAMPL
\MODEL-A

\MODEL-B
\MODEL-C

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
7 inform us,we will delete
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) B–66102E/10

d) \MCOMP\USR\SAMPL
Under this directory, the files including such a link control file,
compiler/link result files, and program files as described in
Appendix D are stored. Use these files as reference information
for development.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
8 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

3.2 This operation loads the executor file under the library directory of the
FANUC MACRO Compiler system installed by the operation of Section
INSTALLING THE 3.1.
EXECUTOR FILE As with the FANUC MACRO Compiler system floppy disk, set the
FROM THE FANUC FANUC MACRO Library floppy disk in the floppy disk drive, then
MACRO LIBRARY activate ESETUP.BAT on the executor floppy disk.
> ?:\>ESETUP <in> <out>
FLOPPY DISK
? : : The root directory of the library floppy disk contains
ESETUP.BAT.
<in> : Specify the name of the drive containing the library floppy
disk.
<out> : Specify the drive name of the hard disk holding the system.

Examples Set the library floppy disk in drive B:, and the library file is stored in the
system installed on the hard disk of drive A:.
> B:\>ESETUP B: A:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
9 inform us,we will delete
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) B–66102E/10

3.3 All system software is contained under the \MCOMP\TOOL directory.


So specify this directory by path setting with AUTOEXEC.BAT.
PATH SETTING

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
10 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

3.4 To match the CNC series, there are three types of the FANUC MACRO
Compiler system:
COMPILER SERIES
a) For Series 0/Series 16/Series 18/Series 20/Series 21
b) For Series 15–A/15–B
c) For Series 15i–A
These Compiler systems are for the respective series only. Compiling the
same macro program using these compiler systems generates different
object codes. For this reason, be sure to use the execution files (macro
compiler/linker/memory card converter) and library files suitable to the
development model. (The library file names are given in Appendix L.)
If multiple systems are to be installed on the same personal computer, it
is recommended that a separate directory be used for each CNC series.

CNC Series and Corresponding Software (See also Fig. 4.7.)


Memory card
CNC series Macro compiler Macro linker
format converter
0/16/18/20/21 MCOMP0 MMCARD*1
MLINK
15–A/15–B MCOMP15 MMCARD15*2
15i–A MCOMP15I MLINK15I MCARD15I
*1 MMCARD is for the Series 16–B/16–C/16i–A/16i–B/18–B/18C/18i–A/18i–B/20/
21–B/21i–A/21i–B/0i–A only.
*2 MMCARD15 is for the Series 15–B only.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
11 inform us,we will delete
3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) B–66102E/10

3.5
SPECIFYING
ENVIRONMENT
VARIABLES

3.5.1 A macro program or a ROM-format file is transferred via the


Selecting a RS-232-C/GPIB interface. The interface control systems vary between
personal computer manufacturers. Control software including MPOUT,
RS–232–C/GPIB MROMWT, and MROMWTG is therefore designed to determine the
Interface Control control system according to the setting of the MDEV environment
System (MDEV) variable.
Specify the MDEV environment variable as follows in
AUTOEXEC.BAT before using control software.
Setting of the MDEV environment variable
set MDEV=PC98 : For the NEC PC98 Series
set MDEV=FMR : For the Fujitsu FMR Series
set MDEV=IBM : For the IBM PC Series
When no MDEV environment variable is specified, control software runs
in the control system for the NEC PC98 Series.

3.5.2 The macro compiler or macro linker generates or deletes some temporary
Specifying a files (work files) for compiling or linking. The destination to which the
temporary files are output can be specified with the MTMP environment
Temporary File Output variable.
Destination (MTMP)
Setting of the MTMP environment variable
set MTMP=B:\TEMP
If the temporary file output destination is specified as a RAM disk,
compiling or linking time can be reduced.
When no MTMP environment variable is specified, temporary files are
generated in the current directory for compiling or linking and deleted
after compiling or linking

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
12 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 4. FUNCTIONS

4 FUNCTIONS

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
13 inform us,we will delete
4. FUNCTIONS B–66102E/10

4.1
MACRO COMPILER (1) Operation
(MCOMP0/MCOMP15/ The macro compiler can compile macro programs created in the
MS-DOS text file format. The macro compiler outputs an object file
MCOMP15i) for the macro linker, reference list file, and compile list file.
*1 *2
A:\> MCOMP0 file-spec [parameters]
==> (For Series 0/16/18/20/21)
A:\> MCOMP15 file-spec [parameters]
==> (For Series 15–A/B)
A:\> MCOMP15I file-spec [parameters]
==> (For Series 15i–A)

Source File Object File

Macro Object
Program MCOMP0 Program
MCOMP15
MCOMP15I
(xx.SRC) (xx.REL)

Reference List File(xx.REF)


Compile List File (xx.LST)

MACRO COMPILER

1 O0001;
2 #100=#101+10;

*1 file-spec
This specifies a macro program source file. The extension of a
source file name must be .SRC. Source files to be compiled can
be specified in three ways:
(1) Compilation of a single file
A:\> MCOMP0 ABC=> Compiles ABC.SRC.
(2) Compilation of multiple cards by using a wild card
A:\> MCOMP0 ABC*=>
Compiles all files whose names start with ABC and have the
extension .SRC,
(3) Selective compilation according to link control file
specification
A:\> MCOMP0 @ABC=>
Compiles all files specified in the link control file (file name:
ABC.LNK).

CAUTION
As described in Section 3.4, even if the same macro
program is compiled, the macro compiler for Series
0/16/18/20/21 creates an object file different from an object
file created by the macro compiler for Series 15 and Series
15i. Select the compiler that matches a development
model.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
14 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 4. FUNCTIONS

*2 [parameters]
This specifies compile conditions.
–NR : Outputs no object file. If this parameter is omitted, an
object file with the extension .REL is output.
–L1 : Outputs no compile list file. If this parameter is omitted,
a compile list file with the extension .LST is output.
–L2 : Outputs no reference list file. If this parameter is omitted,
a reference list file with the extension .REF is output.
–L3 : Outputs a macro program file. If this parameter is
omitted, no macro program file is output. A macro
program file is output with the extension .PRG.
–PR : Makes no symbolic macro program analysis. Specify this
parameter when a program coded in standard macro
program format is to be compiled. No reference list file
is output. Even if this parameter is not specified, a macro
program can be compiled without trouble. However, this
parameter can save time required to make a symbolic
macro program analysis and can also save space for
reference list file output.
–Fo : Specifies a destination to which an object file is output.
See item (7).
–Fr : Specifies a destination to which a reference list file is
output.
–Fl : Specifies a destination to which a compile list file is
output.
–Fp : Specifies a destination to which a macro program file is
output.
(2) Macro program source file
A macro program source file must be created in MS-DOS text file
format. At this time, be sure to assign the file name extension .SRC.
The macro compiler can compile a macro program coded in symbolic
format.
For detailed information, see Chapter 5.
The macro compiler can also compile a program coded in standard
macro program format. In this case, specify the command parameter
-PR. This parameter can save time required to make a symbolic
macro program analysis and can also save space for reference list file
output.
(3) Object file
An object file output by the compiler is subject to processing by the
macro linker. The name of an object file is the same as the source file
name, except that the extension .REL is assigned to the object file.
(4) Reference list file
The reference list file is a list file output from macro program analysis
processing. A source program, errors, error codes, symbol name
cross reference information are listed. The name of a reference list
file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .REF
is assigned to the reference list file. For output to a printer, for
example, use a standard MS-DOS command.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
15 inform us,we will delete
4. FUNCTIONS B–66102E/10

(5) Compile list file


A compile list file is output as a result of macro program compilation
after symbolic macro program analysis. A source program, errors,
error codes, variable cross reference information, object file size
information, and so forth are listed. The name of a compile list file
is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .LST is
assigned to the compile list file. For output to a printer, for example,
use a standard MS-DOS command.
(6) Macro program file
By specifying the command parameter -L3, a macro program after
macro program analysis processing can be preserved as a file. The
name of a macro program file is the same as the source file name,
except that the extension .PRG is assigned to the macro program file.
By using the serial interface utility described in Section 4.5, this file
can be output to the CNC/FANUC SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line.
(7) Specifying the destinations to which the compiler outputs files
The directory of the destinations to which the compiler outputs files
can be specified as desired according to compiling conditions.
However, this function is only effective for FANUC MACRO
Compiler Version 02.1 and later versions.

–Fo : Specifies a destination to which an object file is output.


–Fr : Specifies a destination to which a reference list file is
output.
–Fl : Specifies a destination to which a compile list file is output.
–Fp : Specifies a destination to which a macro program file is
output.

Example)
Compiling TEST.SRC and outputting TEST.REL to B:\OBJ
MCOMP0 TEST -FoB:\OBJ

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
16 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 4. FUNCTIONS

4.2
MACRO LINKER (1) Operation
(MLINK) According to the specification in a link control file created
beforehand, the macro linker creates a link list file and ROM-format
file for creating a desired macro cassette.
*1 *2
A:\> MLINK file-spec [parameters]
==> (For Series 0/16/18/20/21/15–A/15–B)
A:\> MLINK15I file-spec [parameters]
==> (For Series 15i–A)

Link control File ROM Format File

Link ROM
Control MLINK File
MLINK15I
(xx.LNK) (xx.ROM)

Object File Link List File(xx.MAP)

Object MACRO LINKER


Program prog. Size.
1 O0001 00100H
(xx.REL) 2 O0002 00200H

Macro
Library
file

(xx.MEX)

*1 file-spec
This specifies a link control file created in a specified format
beforehand. The extension of a link control file name must be
.LNK.
*2 [parameters]
This specifies link conditions.
–NR : Outputs no ROM-format file. If this parameter is
omitted, a ROM-format file with the extension .ROM is
output.
–NL : Outputs no link list file. If this parameter is omitted, a
link list file with the extension .MAP is output.
–Fm : Specifies the destination to which a link list file is output.
See item (4).
–Fr : Specifies the destination to which a ROM-format file is
output

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
17 inform us,we will delete
4. FUNCTIONS B–66102E/10

(2) Link control file


The link control file specifies a library file name, compile
parameters, and object file names subject to linkage. As with a source
file, a link control file must be created in MS-DOS text file format.
At this time, be sure to assign the file name extension .LNK.
In a link control file, a library file name, compile parameters, and
object file names subject to linkage are defined using keywords. A
comment line can be provided by using /:.

Keyword)
CNC= :
1st library file name for each CNC model
See Appendix
CNC2= :
2nd library file name for each CNC model L for details.
CNC3= :
3rd library file name for each CNC model
P9999= :
Compile parameters 9000 to 9059
FILE= :
Object file (Multiple object files can be specified with
each name delimited by a comma.)
HFILE= : Intel 32-bit hexadecimal file (Multiple object files can
be specified with each name delimited by a comma.)
SYSTEM= : path–name (Series 16i/18i/21i/15i)
SYSTEM value Specified path
MPATH1 First path of M series * MPATH1 is fixed
for series 15i–A
MPATH2 Second path of M series
TPATH1 First path of T series
TPATH2 Second path of T series
LPATH1 First path of loader

Example)
/:
/: MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE (SAMPLE)
/:
/: FOR F16MB
CNC=A:\MCOMP\MEX\F16MB_07.MEX
/:
P9000=00010000
P9010=100
P9037=5
P9038=8000
/: JIKKOU-MACRO
FILE=ABC,DEF
FILE=XYZ,UVW
/: TAIWA-MACRO
FILE=SSS
The example above is for Series 16–MB. The compile parameters (Nos. 9000.
9010, 9037, and 9038) are set, and the object files (ABC.REF. DEF.REL,
XYZ.REL, UVW.REL, and SSS.REL) are linked.
The specification of (=0) is assumed for those compile parameters that are
not specified in the link control file.
A link control file is used also as a selective compile control file by the
macro compiler, as described in item (1) in Section 4.1. This function is
useful in compiling all programs to be linked.
A:\> MCOMP0 @ABS ⇒ compiles all files specified in the link
control file (file name: ABC.LNK).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
18 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 4. FUNCTIONS

(3) Link list file


The link list file is output by the linker, and a library name, compile
parameters, compile program list and size information, erroneous
program numbers, error codes, ROM-format file size information and
so forth are listed.
The name of a link list file is the same as the link control file name,
except that the extension .MAP is assigned to the link list file name.
For output to a printer, for example, use a standard MS-DOS
command.

(4) Specifying the destinations to which the macro linker outputs


files
The directory of the destinations to which the macro linker outputs
files can be specified as desired according to linking conditions.

NOTE
This function is effective only for FANUC MACRO Compiler
Version 02.1 and later versions.

–Fm : Specifies a destination to which a link list file is output.


–Fr : Specifies a destination to which a ROM-format file is output.
Example: Generating SAMPL.MAP to directory B:\MAP and
SAMPL.ROM to directory C:\ROM
MLINK SAMPL -FmB:\MAP -FrC:\ROM

(5) Checking the size of ROM format file (Exclusive for Series
16-B/C, 18-B/C, 21-B, 16i–A/B, 18i–A/B, 21i–A/B, 0i–A and
15i–A) at linking macro
A ROM format file that is created by linking (MLINK) is checked for
its size whether it is overflown or not. The size of ROM format file
is set by compile parameter No. 9000 and 9001 (No.8500 for
series15i–A).
If a prepared ROM format file may exceed the size that was set by
compile parameter 9000 (No.8500 for series15i) and 9001 as a result
of linking, an error is produced when the macro linker is executed.
ERROR : ROM size over
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Compile 9000 M3MB M2MB M1MB M512 M256 M128
parameter
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Compile 9001 M4MB
parameter

M4MB M3MB M2MB M1MB M512 M256 M128


4.0MB 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
3.0MB 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
2.0MB 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1.0MB 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
512KB 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
256KB 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
128KB 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
19 inform us,we will delete
4. FUNCTIONS B–66102E/10

NOTE
1 For the 21-TB (Controller A), always specify 128 KB.
2 For the Series 16, a 128-KB ROM-format file cannot be
specified.
3 For the 21-MB or 21-TB (Controller B), no more than 1.0 MB
can be specified.
4 For the 0i–A, no more than 512 KB can be specified.

D Series 15i–A
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Compile 8500 R10 R05
parameter
R10 R05
1.0MB 1 0
512KB 0 1
256KB 0 0

NOTE
For the Series 15i–A, only the combinations given in the
table above are possible.

(6) Error messages


1) When the Series 16i/18i/21i–A Macro library is linked using a
macro linker (MLINK.EXE) of MACRO COMPILER version
03.2 or earlier, the following error will occur:
ERROR: Executer#1 is not specified
2) When the SYSTEM keyword is not specified, the following error
will occur:
ERROR: Can not find SYSTEM define

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
20 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 4. FUNCTIONS

4.3 A linked ROM-format file can be transferred to CNC memory via a


RS-232-C line, and whether the created ROM-format file operates
ROM–FORMAT FILE correctly can be checked using the macro executor RAM operation
TRANSMITTER (CNC) function of the CNC system.
(FOR Series
NOTE
16/18/20/21T–A) The Series 0i–A or Series 21–B does not support this
function.

(1) Operation
After placing the CNC system in the macro executor receive ready
state, a linked ROM-format file is transferred with the following
command:
A:\> MTRNSC file-spec parameters -F -S
*1 file-spec
This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred.
*2 parameters
CNC model Number of address bits Addressing
Series 16 32 00800000
Series 18 24 800000
Series 20 24 980000
Series 21-TA 24 3A0000

–F : Overwriting loader command (See item (3).)


–S : Not required in the Series 16/18–A.
Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is transferred to Series 16-A.
A:\> MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000

(2) RS-232-C interface


For transfer, the RS-232-C serial interface channel at standard port
No. 0 is used. Before a RS-232–C interface can be used, it must be
set and initialized according to the conditions below.
Transfer rate : Value set with the connected CNC system
Data length : 7 bits
Parity : Enable/even parity
Stop bit : Value set with the connected CNC system
Xon/off control applied
For detailed information, see Chapter 6.
(3) Overwriting loader command effective
Only a user macro program can be transferred (execution of the
overwriting loader function ) by specifying the transfer parameter.
First all the files are transferred once, then only the changed user
macro program is transferred. This enables the macro program to be
debugged.
(This function is only effective for FANUC MACRO Compiler
Version 02.1 and later versions.)
Example)
MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000 -F
–F : Overwriting loader command
When this command is specified, only the macro program (P-code
program) is transferred from the ROM-format file; execution control
software (executor) is not transferred.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
21 inform us,we will delete
4. FUNCTIONS B–66102E/10

a) Activate the P-code loader function in the initialization loader


function mode specified for the CNC (bit 1 of parameter No. 8701
= 0) to transfer all files from the personal computer.
MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000
b) Debug the macro program.
c) If an error is found, correct the macro program and compile or
link the macro program to create the ROM-format file again.
d) Activate the P-code loader function in the overwriting loader
function mode specified for the CNC (bit 1 of parameter No. 8701
= 1). Specifying -F transfers the macro program from the
personal computer.
MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000 -F
Repeat steps b), c), and d) to debug the macro program.
If the library to be linked has been modified according to the software
revision, the above procedure must be followed again from step a),
transferring all files.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
22 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 4. FUNCTIONS

4.4
ROM–FORMAT FILE (1) Operation
TRANSMITTER A linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC PMC
Writer or FANUC FA Writer via a RS-232-C line, and is written to
(FANUC PMC a macro ROM and verified.
WRITER/FANUC FA A:\> MROMWT file-spec parameters
Write or write/verification
WRITER) A:\> MROMVF file-spec parameters
(FOR Series 0, 15–A, Verification
16–A, 18–A)
*1 file-spec
This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred.
*2 parameters
-K1xx : Cassette type (1)
-K2xx : Cassette type (2)
-IDxxxx: ID code
-VCxx : Sets Vcc (with MROMWT only).
-VPxx : Sets Vpp (with MROMWT only).
-Pxx : Sets pulse width (with MROMWT only).
-VF : Writes a ROM-format file, then verifies it (with
MROMWT only).
For detailed information, see Appendix C.
Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is written to a Series 0 512K-byte
ROM cassette, then is verified.
A:\> MROMWT SAMPL.ROM –K110 –K223 –ID50B2
–VCC0 –VP64 -P01 -VF
(2) RS-232-C interface
For detailed information, see Chapter 6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
23 inform us,we will delete
4. FUNCTIONS B–66102E/10

4.5
SERIAL INTERFACE
UTILITY

4.5.1
Macro Program Input (1) Operation
A macro program is read from the CNC/SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C
line, then is stored in an MS-DOS text file for the macro compiler.
A macro program is transferred from the CNC/SYSTEM P after the
command below is entered and the personal computer is placed in
receive ready state.
A:\> MPLOADA file-spec
1* file-spec
This specifies the name of a text file for storing a macro program.
Example: A macro program is read to
A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\ABC.SRC.
A:\> MPLOADA A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\ABC.SRC

CAUTION
Select the ISO code as output code when transferring a
macro program from the CNC/SYSTEM P.

4.5.2
Macro Program Output (1) Operation
A macro program output with the parameter -L3 described in Section
4.1 can be output to the CNC/SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line. After
the CNC/SYSTEM P is placed in program read ready state, a macro
program is transferred by the command below.
A:\> MPOUT file-spec parameters
*1 file-spec
This specifies a macro program file to be transferred.
*2 parameters
–Fffff : Outputs fields (null code) before and after a macro
program. By ffff, specify the number of fields to be
output.
–CR : Specifies the output format of the EOB (;).
When -CR is omitted:The EOB (;) is converted to
LF(0AH)/CR(0DH)/CR(0DH).
When -CR is specified:The EOB (;) is converted to
LF(0AH).
(2) RS-232-C interface
For detailed information, see Chapter 6.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
24 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 4. FUNCTIONS

4.6
ROM–FORMAT FILE (1) Operation
TRANSMITTER A linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC FA Writer via
a GP-IB interface, and is written to a macro cassette and verified.
(FANUC FA WRITER, Since a linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC FA
GP–IB INTERFACE) Writer via a GP-IN interface, the file can be written to a macro cassette
and verified at higher speed than when the file is transferred via a
(FOR Series 0, 15–A, RS-232-C line (Section 4.4).
16–A, 18–A)
A:\> MROMWTG file-spec parameters
Write or write/verification
A:\> MROMVFG file-spec parameters
Verification
*1 file-spec
This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred.
*2 parameters
-K1xx : Cassette type (1)
-K2xx : Cassette type (2)
-IDxxxx : ID code
-VCxx : Sets Vcc (with MROMWTG only).
-VPxx : Sets Vpp (with MROMWTG only).
-Pxx : Sets pulse width (with MROMWTG only).
-VF : Writes a ROM-format file, then verifies it (with
MROMWTG only).
For detailed information, see Appendix C.
Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is written to a Series 0
512K-byte ROM cassette, then is verified.
A:\> MROMWTG SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K223
-ID50B2 -VCC0 -VP64 -P01 -VF
(2) GP-IB interface
For detailed information, see Chapter 7.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
25 inform us,we will delete
4. FUNCTIONS B–66102E/10

4.7
CONVERSION TO A (1) Operation
Convert a ROM-format file created by the macro linker (MLINK) to
MEMORY CARD the memory-card format file which can be loaded from the memory
FORMAT (MMCARD) card using the boot function of the Series 15-B/16-B/20.
(THIS FUNCTION IS A:\> MMCARD file-spec
(Series 16–B/16–C/18–B/18–C/20/21-B/
USED IN THE Series 16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/18i–B/21i–A/21i–B)
15–B/16–B/16–C/18–B A:\> MMCARD15 file–spec (Series 15–B)

/18–C/20/21–B/ *1 file-spec
This specifies a ROM-format File to be converted without
16i–A/18i–A/21i–A/ extension. The name of MEM-format file is the same as
16i–B/18i–B/21i–B/ ROM-format File name with the extension .MEM.
0i–A.) Example: A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL.ROM is
converted into
A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL.MEM.
A:\> MMCARD15
A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL
Series 16-B/16–C/18-B/
18–C/20/21-B/
16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/
18i–B/21i–A/21i–B

Source File MCOMP0 Object File

Macro Object
Program MCOMP15 Program
(xxx.SRC) (xxx.REL)
(Sereis 15-B)

MCOMP15I
Series 15–B/16–B/16–C/
(Sereis 15i–A) 18–B/18–C/20/21-B/
16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/
18i–B/21i–A/21i–B
Link Control File
ROM File
MLINK
Link
Control
(xxx.LNK) (xxx.ROM)
MLINK15I

Macro Library File (Sereis 15i–A)

Macro
Library
(xxx.MEX)
MMCARD MMCARD15 MMCARD15I

Series 16-B/16–C/18-B/ (Sereis 15-B) (Sereis 15i–A)


18–C/20/21-B/
16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/
18i–B/21i–A/21i–B/
0i–A

To memory card Memory Card File


COPY A:xxx.MEM F:
(F: Memory card device number)
Memory Card Memory
Card File
(xxx.MEM)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
26 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

5 SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

A macro program is to be created according the rule described below.


(1) A macro program must start with address O. Address % must be
specified at the end of the file. Multiple programs can be coded in a
single file. At this time, the start of each program can be identified
by address O. Data after address %, if any, is ignored. When multiple
programs are coded, address % must be coded at the end.

O0001 #101=1;
G00 X#101;
:
O0002 G243 X0 YX (ABS);
#500=#501+#502;
:
%

(2) One line can contain only one block. The end of block (EOB) is
represented by a semicolon (;). All data after a semicolon on a line
is regarded as a comment.

#100=#101; COMMENT
G00 X123. Y234. ; G01 ; =>
”G01 ;” after ; is regarded as comment.

(3) All data after /: is regarded as a comment. A line starting with /* is


regarded as a comment line; such a line is not compiled.

/: comment => Compiler ignores this line as comment line.


/: comment
/:
O0001 ;
/: comment => Compiler ignores this line as comment line.
G00 ...;
;/: comment => Blank block containing only ; is created.
M99;
%

(4) Programming using symbolic names


A symbolic name can be defined for a variable, expression, or
character string to allow programming using symbolic names. A
symbolic name can be defined as described below.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
27 inform us,we will delete
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM B–66102E/10

Symbolic name definition


@xxxx yyyyyy
xxxx: Symbolic name
(String of alphanumeric characters beginning with an
alphabetic character)

Version 1.4 or pre- Version 2.1 or subse-


Version of the compiler
vious versions quent versions
Maximum number of
8 32
characters

yyyyyy: Definition character string (not longer than 80 characters)


After a symbolic name is defined, the symbolic name used in a program
is replaced by the corresponding definition character string.

Example)
@COUNT1 #100
@ON =1
@OFF =0
@CURSOR #8505
@RETURN M99
/:
O0001 ; ==>> O0001 ;
CURSOR ON ; #8505 =1 ;
COUNT1 = COUNT1+1 ; #100 = #100+1 ;
RETURN ; M99 ;

(5) Symbolic name for sequence number


A symbolic name can be assigned to a sequence number as described
below. In (4) above, a symbolic name is just used for a definition
character string. On the other hand, a symbolic name for a sequence
number is regarded as a sequence number when it is coded at the start
of a block, and is regarded as a jump (GOTO) destination number
when it is coded at a position other than the start of a block.
Definition of symbolic name for sequence number
>xxxx 9999
xxxx: Symbolic name for sequence number
(String of alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic
character)
Version 1.4 or Version 2.1 or
Version of the compiler
previous versions subsequent versions
Maximum number of
8 32
characters

9999: Number (not longer than four digits)


After a symbolic name is defined, the symbolic name used in a program
is replaced by the corresponding sequence number.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
28 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

Example)
@COUNT1 #100
>JUMP1 100
>SKIP 200
/:
O0002 ; ==> O0002 ;
GOTO JUMP1 ; GOTO 100 ;
IF[COUNT1 LE 0]GOTO SKIP ; IF[#100 LE 0]GOTO 200 ;
SKIP ; N200 ;
JUMP1 M99 ; N100 M99 ;
(6) Automatic conversion of hiragana and kanji codes
Hiragana and kanji, when coded in quotation marks and
parentheses as (’ ’), can be auto-matically converted to internal
macro compiler codes by coding.
(’ ’) ==> (:3929 3671 3872 3439
2437 245E 2439:)
Kanji and hiragana must be coded using full-size characters, and
alphanumeric characters, spaces, special symbols must be coded
using half-size characters.
Specifying a compiling condition as -FS0 enables the characters
usable in the Series 0 to be checked. When -FS0 is specified, the
characters unusable in the Series 0 cause a compiling error.
(This specification is only effective for FANUC MACRO Compiler
Version 02.1 and later versions.)

MCOMP0 TEST -FS0


(7) Reference to external file ($INCLUDE control statement)
By using the $INCLUDE control statement, a program, symbol
definition, and so forth contained in a separate file can be referenced.
With this function, definitions and processing common to multiple
programs can be specified in a separate file so that each program file
can reference those definitions and processing.

Example)
Program file
/:
$INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
/:
O0003 ; ==> O0003 ;
TAIWAP1 =5 ; #8500 =5 ;
RETURN ; M99 ;

Include file (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)


/:
@TAIWAP1 #8500
@RETURN M99
/:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
29 inform us,we will delete
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM B–66102E/10

(8) Array variable coding


Variables can be used as a one-dimensional array by using a simple
coding method.
Coding method
#999<expression>
999: Number of first variable in array
By this coding method, variables can be referenced or written to as
array data with an index indicated by the expression and starting with
the variable specified in 999.
#100<#101> is equivalent to #[100+#101].
(9) Reference list page eject control ($EJECT control statement)
By using the $EJECT control statement, reference list page eject
operation can be freely controlled.
Example)
Program file
/:
$EJECT
/: ⇐ Advances reference list page.
O0003 ;
D
D

(10)Enhancement of IF and WHILE statements


The IF and WHILE statements have been enhanced.
(a) Determination of an operation result
Only an operation expression can be specified as the condition of
the IF or WHILE statement. The execution of the IF or WHILE
statement is controlled depending on whether the operation result
is equal to 0.
Format:
WHILE[operation-expression] DOx ;
ENDx ;

IF[operation-expression] GOTO xxx ;


IF[operation-expression] THEN<Macro statement>;

Example)
The left macro instructions are equivalent to the right macro
instructions.
WHILE[#100]DO1; å WHILE[#100 NE 0]DO1;
D D
D D
END1; END1;

IF[#100+#101]GOTO123; å IF[[#100+#101]NE 0 ]GOTO123;


IF[SIN[#1]]THEN #1=0; å IF [SIN[#1] NE 0] THEN #1=0 ;

(b) Logical operations, AND and OR


Multiple conditions can be specified in an IF statement. The
conditions ANDed or ORed control the execution of the IF
statement.
Format :
IF[<condition>&&<condition>]GOTO xxx;
IF[<condition>||<condition>]THEN<MACRO statement> ;
An AND is represented with an && sign and OR with an ££ sign.
Up to three ANDs or ORs can be specified in a single IF
statement. However, an AND and OR must not be specified
together in a single IF statement.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
30 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

IF[<condition>&&<condition>&&<condition>&&
<condition>] THEN<MACRO stmnt>; –OK
IF[<condition>||<condition>||<condition>||
<condition>]GOTO xxx; –OK
IF[<condition>&&<condition>||<condition>]
GOTO xxx ; –NG

Example)
IF[#100 EQ 1 && #101 GT 0] GOTO 100 ;
IF[#100 E Q1 ||#101 NE 1 || #102 GT 10 ] THEN #102=1 ;

(c) IF/THEN/ELSE/ENDIF
The syntax of an IF statement has been enhanced. Structured
programming is possible using IF/THEN/ELSE/ENDIF.
The following shows the formats of syntactically valid IF
statements.
 IF[...]GOTO 999 ;

 IF[...]THEN Macro-st ;

 IF[...]THEN Macro-st; *Macro-st:


ELSE Macro-st; Macro statement

 IF[...]THEN ;
Statement ; *Statement:
D Macro or NC statement
D
ENDIF ;

 IF[...]THEN ;
Statement ;
D
D
ELSE ;
Statement ;
D
D
ENDIF ;

a) When only a single macro statement is to be executed, the macro


statement can be specified immediately after THEN/ELSE as
shown in  and .

IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN #101 = 1;


ELSE #101 = 2;

b) When an instruction to be executed is an NC statement or


multiple instructions to be executed, the NC statement or
multiple instructions must be specified between the
THEN/ELSE line and ENDIF line as shown in  and .

IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN ;
GO1 X100 Y200 ;
ENDIF ;

When instructions with THEN and ELSE must be executed as


shown in , the IF statement can be specified by combining the
formats in a) and b).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
31 inform us,we will delete
5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM B–66102E/10

IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN #101 = 1;


ELSE ;
#101 = 2 ;
GOO X#103 ;
ENDIF ;
Up to three levels of nesting of the IF statement are allowed.

IF [...] THEN ;
IF [...] THEN ;
Statement ;


ELSE ;
IF [...] THEN ;
Statement ;
ENDIF ;
ENDIF ;
Statement ;


ELSE ;
Statement ;


ENDIF ;

CAUTION
When only a single macro statement is to be executed, the
macro statement can be specified immediately after
THEN/ELSE. In this case, no ENDIF statement is usually
required. However, an ENDIF statement is required when
IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; is specified just before ELSE or
ENDIF of the previous nesting as shown below:
IF [...] THEN ;
IF [...] THEN Macro-st ;
IF [...] THEN Macro-st ;
ENDIF ; äThe ENDIF line is required
ELSE ; because IF [...] THEN
Macro-st ; is specified just
before ELSE or ENDIF of
the previous nesting.
IF [...] THEN Macro-st ;
IF [...] THEN Macro-st ;
ENDIF ; äThe ENDIF line is required
ENDIF ; because IF [...] THEN
Macro-st ; is specified just
before ELSE or ENDIF of
the previous nesting.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
32 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 6. RS-232-C INTERFACE SETTING

6 RS-232-C INTERFACE SETTING

To transfer a ROM-format file to the CNC system or FANUC


PMC-Writer/FA-Writer for writing to ROM/verification or transfer a
macro program, the RS-232-C interface is controlled using the DOS
function call (21H) auxiliary I/O device (AUX) for MS-DOS. By device
specification with CONFIG.SYS, enable RS-232-C ports to be controlled
with the auxiliary I/O device (AUX).
The RS-232-C interface must be set or initialized beforehand according
to the conditions described below. If a transfer operation is once
performed via a RS-232-C interface, and the RS-232-C is used again with
the same or another command, the RS-232-C interface must be
initialized.

Transfer rate : Value set with the connected CNC system


Data length : 7 bits
Parity : Enable/even parity
Stop bit : Value set with the connected CNC system
Xon/off control
System installation processing creates, for use by the user, a standard
batch file for RS-232-C interface initialization under the directory
\MCOMP\TOOL.

(1) For Fujitsu FMR Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSFMR.BAT)


Contents : SETUP RSC R0,4800,BITS-7,
PARITY-EVEN.STOP-2,XON

(2) For NEC PC98 Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSPC98.BAT)


Contents : SPEED RS232-0 4800 BITS-7 PARITY-EVEN
STOP-2 XON

(3) For IBM PC-AT Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSPCAT.BAT)


Contents : MODE COM1:48,E,7,2

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
33 inform us,we will delete
7. GP-IB INTERFACE SETTING
(FOR Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) B–66102E/10

GP-IB INTERFACE SETTING

7 (FOR Series 0, 15-A, 16-A, 18-A)

The GP-IB interface performs interface processing by using a GP-IB


BIOS driver provided by each personal computer supplier. The user is to
prepare a GP-IB interface board for a personal computer model to use, and
to initialize the board according to the operator’s manual before usage.
(1) GP-IB interface board
Use the GP-IB interface boards listed below.
(a) NEC PC98 Series
NEC GP-IB (IEEE-488) interface board (PC-9801-29N)
(b) IBM PC-AT Series
NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS
VAT-GPIB Interface & NI-488.2 MS-DOS/NI-488.2 WindowGs
SoftwareW
FD3/FD5 NO.776207-1
(2) GP-IB interface board setting
(a) Set the GP-IB address to 1E (hexadecimal).
When an address other than 1E is to be used for some reason, the
same address must be set in the parameter -MAxx of the
ROM-format file transmitter command
(MROMWTG/MROMVFG).
When GP-IB address OF is set:
A:\> MROMWTG SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K223 -ID40B0 -MA0F
(b) Select the master mode rather than the slave mode.
The master mode must be selected because the GP-IB control
function is performed on the personal computer.
(c) Others
For other settings, refer to the operator’s manual of each GP-IB
board.
(3) FANUC FA Writer setting
(a) Set the GP-IB address to 00 (hexadecimal).
The address is factory-set to 00.
(b) Set the transfer block size to 2058 bytes.
The block size is factory-set to 256 bytes.
(4) Switching the interface of the FANUC FA Writer

(a) Switching the interface of the FANUC FA Writer to a GPIB


interface.
To switch the interface, turn on the power to the FANUC FA
Writer while pressing the FUNCTION key. The FANUC FA
Writer then enters the GPIB interface mode.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
34 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 8. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE

8 SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE

When the system is installed, a system common symbol definition file is


stored under the directory \MCOMP\TOOL. For macro program
creation, the user should make full use of the symbolic names defined in
the file for variables commonly used with the system.

System common symbol definition file


File name: \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF

To use this file, use the external file reference function described in Item
(7) in Chapter 5. For a usage example, see Appendix D.

$INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF

For information about the defined symbols, see Appendix A.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
35 inform us,we will delete
9. HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST B–66102E/10

9 HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST

A source program coded using symbolic macro programs is converted by


the macro compiler to a program in custom macro format for compile
processing. The macro compiler outputs two types of list files: one for
a reference list, and the other for a compile list.
Since conversion processing is performed, the comment lines and symbol
definition lines in a source program are not listed. For this reason, a
reference list and compile list output two types of line numbers to identify
a compile error in a source program.
(1) Reference list
A source program coded using symbolic macro programs, cross
reference data of used symbols, error messages from conversion
processing, and so forth are output in a reference list.
Line number S-Line : Source program line number
Line number G-Line : Line number after conversion
(2) Compile list
A program converted to a program in custom macro format, cross
reference data of used variables, compile error messages, and so forth
are output in a compile list.
Line number G-Line : Line number after conversion
Line number P-Line : Line number for each program number
In the example below, the compile list has an error on G-Line 0002; the
same G-Line 0002 in the reference list and the line 4 in the source program
have this error.

Example)
*Reference list (xxx.REF)
---------- Program -------------------------

S-Line G-Line
1 @ABC #100
2 /:
3 0001 O1000 ;
4 0002 ABD = 0 ;
5 0003 M99 ;
6 0004 %

*Compile list (xxx.LST)


---------- program O1000 -------------------
G-Line P-Line
0001 1 O1000;
0002 2 ABD=0;
error #140C -----------^
***** ERROR : 140C Illegal function code.
0003 3 M99;
0004 4 %
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
36 inform us,we will delete
APPENDIX

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION

A (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

D SYSTEM. DEF for series 0/16/18/20/21


$NOLIST
/:
/: **************************************************************
/: * System common symbol define *
/: * for series 0/16/18/20/21. (V01.03 1999.07.21) *
/: **************************************************************
/:
/:
/: No.01 Control instruction code.
/: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@CALL M98P /: Sub program call.
@RETURN M99 /: Return to main program.
@RETURNP M99P /: Return to main program with sequence No.
/:
@DISPLAY G243 /: Character display.
@FORM F /: Format.
@DATA D /: Data.
@NSUP Z0 /: No Zero suppress.
@ZSUP Z1 /: Zero suppress.
/:
@ELASE G202 /: CRT erase.
@ELASEGR G202P1 /: Graphic erase.
@ELASECH G202P2 /: Charactor erase.
@ELASEAL G202P3 /: Graphic & Character erase.
/:
@RECTNG G204 /: Rectangle display.
/:
@GRPNT G206 /: Graphic paint out.
/:
@COLOR G240 /: Display color select.
@BLACK G240P0 /: Black.
@RED G240P1 /: Red.
@GREEN G240P2 /: Green.
@YELLOW G240P3 /: Yellow.
@BLUE G240P4 /: Blue.
@PERPLE G240P5 /: Perple.
@SKYBL G240P6 /: Sky–blue.
@WHITE G240P7 /: White.
@REDR G240P–1 /: Reverse Red.
@GREENR G240P–2 /: Reverse Green.
@YELLOWR G240P–3 /: Reverse Yellow.
@BLUER G240P–4 /: Reverse Blue.
@PERPLER G240P–5 /: Reverse Perple.
@SKYBLR G240P–6 /: Reverse Sky–blue.
@WHITER G240P–7 /: Reverse White.
/:
@BON L1 /: Blink ON
@BOF L0 /: Blink OFF
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
39 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

/:
@DRLINEK G244 /: Graphic Line kind select.
@DRSTART G242 /: Draw start point.
@DRLINE G01 /: Linear line display.
@DRCW G02 /: Circle display(CW).
@DRCCW G03 /: Circle display(CCW).
/:
@GRCSR G249 /: Graphic cursor.
/:
@PMCDATA G310 /: PMC relay/data read and write.
@1BYTE L1 /: 1 BYTE
@2BYTE L2 /: 2 BYTE
@4BYTE L4 /: 4 BYTE
/:
@TRSVR G315 /: P–code variable transfer.
@TRSVRNML G315P001/: normal transfer.
@TRSVRUPT G315P002/: up transfer.
@TRSVRDWT G315P003/: down transfer.
@TRSVRARG G315P101/: transfer to arangement.
@TRSVRUPA G315P102/: up transfer to arangement.
@TRSVRDWA G315P103/: down transfer to arangement.
/:
@PAMAKE G320 /: CNC Prog. access. (Prog. make)
@PADELET G321 /: (Prog. delete)
@PACNDNS G322 /: (Prog. condense)
@PAREAD G325 /: (Block read)
@PAWRITE G326 /: (Block write)
@PABDELT G327 /: (Block delete)
@PACREAD G328 /: (Character block read)
@PACWRIT G329 /: (Character block write)
/:
@RSOPEN G330 /: RS232C open.
@RSCLOSE G331 /: close.
@RSRECV G335 /: receive 1ch.
@RSSEND G336 /: Data send.
@RSVARRD G337 /: Variable data read.
@RSVARWT G338 /: Variable data write.
@RSFUNC G339 /: FANUC cassettee control.
/:
@PMAFEED G340 /: PMC AXIS feed.
@PMACUT G341 /: cutting.
@PMADWLL G344 /: dwell.
@PMAREFC G345 /: reference position return.
@PMAMSCL G346 /: miscellaneous function.
@PMASNRD G348 /: signal read.
@PMASNWT G349 /: signal write.
/:
/:
/: No.02 Conversation MACRO (TAIWA MACRO) control Variable define.
/: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@CMACRO1 #8500 /: Conversation MACRO – 1 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@TAIWAP1 #8500
@CMACRO2 #8550 /: Conversation MACRO – 2 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@TAIWAP2 #8550
@CMACRO3 #8551 /: Conversation MACRO – 3 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@TAIWAP3 #8551
/:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
40 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@KEYCONT #8502 /: MDI–KEY IN CONTROL.


@NOREAD #8502=0 /: No Data read.
@NUMREAD #8502=1 /: Numeric Data read.
@ADRREAD #8502=2 /: Address+Numeric Data read.
@ASCREAD #8502=3 /: ASCII Data read.
/:
@KEYCODE #8501 /: MDI–KEY IN CODE.
@PAGEDW 1 /: ”Page Down” KEY pushed.
@PAGEUP 2 /: ”Page Up”
@CURDW 3 /: ”Cursor Down”
@CURUP 4 /: ”Cursor Up”
@ALTER 5 /: ”Alter”
@INSRT 6 /: ”Insert”
@DELET 7 /: ”Delete”
@INPUT 8 /: ”Input”
@START 9 /: ”Start/Output”
@RESET 10 /: ”Reset”
@CURRT 18 /: ”Cursor Right”
@CURLF 19 /: ”Cursor Left”
@PINPUT 28 /: ”Input” add decimal point
/:
@SFTLF 11 /: ”Soft key left” (9”CRT)
@SFT1 12 /: ”Soft key 1” (9”CRT)
@SFT2 13 /: ”Soft key 2” (9”CRT)
@SFT3 14 /: ”Soft key 3” (9”CRT)
@SFT4 15 /: ”Soft key 4” (9”CRT)
@SFT5 16 /: ”Soft key 5” (9”CRT)
@SFTRT 17 /: ”Soft key right” (9”CRT)
/:
@SFTFLF 20 /: ”Soft key left” (14”CRT)
@SFTF1 21 /: ”Soft key 1” (14”CRT)
@SFTF2 22 /: ”Soft key 2” (14”CRT)
@SFTF3 23 /: ”Soft key 3” (14”CRT)
@SFTF4 24 /: ”Soft key 4” (14”CRT)
@SFTF5 25 /: ”Soft key 5” (14”CRT)
@SFTF6 26 /: ”Soft key 6” (14”CRT)
@SFTF7 27 /: ”Soft key 7” (14”CRT)
@SFTF8 28 /: ”Soft key 8” (14”CRT)
@SFTF9 29 /: ”Soft key 9” (14”CRT)
@SFTF10 30 /: ”Soft key 10” (14”CRT)
@SFTFRT 31 /: ”Soft key right” (14”CRT)

@KEYDATA #8503 /: MDI–KEY IN DATA.


@KEYADRS #8504 /: MDI–KEY IN ADDRESS.
@KEYARRY #8552 /: MDI–KEY SPECIAL READ DATA VAR. No.
/:
@CURSOR #8505 /: CURSOR DISPLAY CONTROL.
@CURSORX #8506 /: CURSOR DISPLAY POSITION (X).
@CURSORY #8507 /: CURSOR DISPLAY POSITION (Y).
/:
@CHRPROG #8509 /: CHARACTER DEFINE PROGRAM No.
@CRTFUNC #8510 /: CRT FUNCTION CONTROL.
/:
@ARRY2BS #8512 /: Array CONTORL
@ARRY3BS #8513 /: Array CONTORL
@ARRY1CT #8516 /: Array CONTORL
@ARRY2CT #8517 /: Array CONTORL
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
41 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

@ARRYTOP #8519 /: Array CONTORL (Top variable No.)


/:
@TRNSDAT #8511 /: Transfer CONTORL
@TRNS2BS #8512 /: Transfer CONTORL
@TRNS3BS #8513 /: Transfer CONTORL
@TRNS2TO #8514 /: Transfer CONTORL
@TRNS3TO #8515 /: Transfer CONTORL
/:
@PAPROGN #8520 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (PROGRAM No.)
@PABLOKN #8521 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (BLOCK No.)
@PAVARNO #8522 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (DATA VAR. No.)
@PAPNTVN #8523 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (POINT DATA VAR. No.)
@PAERROR #8529 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (RETURN CODE)
/:
@PABGEDT #8526 /: BG–edit status.
@PAPGCNT #8527 /: Program count.
@PAFPMEM #8528 /: Free program memory.
/:
@RSERROR #8539 /: RS232C INTERFACE (RETURN CODE)
/:
@MDIKEYI #8549 /: MDI Key image
/:
@CUTTIME #8553 /: Cutting Time.
@CUTLENG #8554 /: Cutting length.
/:
@HELPPNM #8555 /: User’s HELP screen Prog. Num.
@HELPRST #8556 /: User’s HELP return status.
/:
@KEYLINX #8561 /: KEY in line X potion.
@KEYLINY #8562 /: KEY in line Y potion.
@KEYINUM #8563 /: KEY input number.
@KEYPRPT #8564 /: KEY in line prompt.
@KEYCLOR #8565 /: KEY in line color.
/:
@ITLCNTL #8600 /: Inter Lock control.
@ITLSTTS #8601 /: Skip signal movement direction.
/:
@PMGSLCT #8602 /: PMC AXIS select. (G–code control)
/:
@PCDWKNO #8610 /: P–code Work No. search.
/:
@TRQLTO1 #8621 /: AXIS 1 limited torque override.
@TRQLTO2 #8622 /: AXIS 2
@TRQLTO3 #8623 /: AXIS 3
@TRQLTO4 #8624 /: AXIS 4
@TRQLTO5 #8625 /: AXIS 5
@TRQLTO6 #8626 /: AXIS 6
@TRQLTO7 #8627 /: AXIS 7
@TRQLTO8 #8628 /: AXIS 8
/:
@CNVTAD1 #8631 /: CHANNEL 1 A/D converter.
@CNVTAD2 #8632 /: CHANNEL 2
@CNVTAD3 #8633 /: CHANNEL 3
@CNVTAD4 #8634 /: CHANNEL 4
/:
@MSKCLAX #8690 /: AXIS Macro call mask.
@MSKCLTC #8691 /: T code call mask.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
42 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

/:
@PMVSLCT #8700 /: PMC AXIS select. (VARIABLE control)
@PMVFLG1 #8710 /: PMC 1 control flag.
@PMVCMD1 #8711 /: command.
@PMVCSP1 #8712 /: cutting speed.
@PMVLNG1 #8713 /: length.
@PMVSTS1 #8715 /: status.
@PMVFLG2 #8720 /: PMC 2 control flag.
@PMVCMD2 #8721 /: command.
@PMVCSP2 #8722 /: cutting speed.
@PMVLNG2 #8723 /: length.
@PMVSTS2 #8725 /: status.
@PMVFLG3 #8730 /: PMC 3 control flag.
@PMVCMD3 #8731 /: command.
@PMVCSP3 #8732 /: cutting speed.
@PMVLNG3 #8733 /: length.
@PMVSTS3 #8735 /: status.
@PMVFLG4 #8740 /: PMC 4 control flag.
@PMVCMD4 #8741 /: command.
@PMVCSP4 #8742 /: cutting speed.
@PMVLNG4 #8743 /: length.
@PMVSTS4 #8745 /: status.
/:
@WINDIDX #8998 /: Window Index.
@WINDDAT #8999 /: Window Data.
/:
/:
/: No.03 System Variable.
/: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@EMPTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”.
@ENMTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”.
@ALARM #3000 /: Alarm display.
@TIMER1 #3001 /: Msec Timer.
@TIMER2 #3002 /: Hour Timer.
@SBKCNT #3003 /: Single blok/Auxilialy function control.
@FLDCNT #3004 /: Feed hold/Over ride control.
@SETTING #3005 /: Setting data.
@DATE #3011 /: System date.
@TIME #3012 /: System Time.
@PARTCNT #3901 /: Part count.
@PARTRQT #3902 /: Part request.
@MDLG01 #4001 /: Modal G–code Group 1
@MDLG02 #4002 /: Modal G–code Group 2
@MDLG03 #4003 /: Modal G–code Group 3
@MDLG04 #4004 /: Modal G–code Group 4
@MDLG05 #4005 /: Modal G–code Group 5
@MDLG06 #4006 /: Modal G–code Group 6
@MDLG07 #4007 /: Modal G–code Group 7
@MDLG08 #4008 /: Modal G–code Group 8
@MDLG09 #4009 /: Modal G–code Group 9
@MDLG10 #4010 /: Modal G–code Group 10
@MDLG11 #4011 /: Modal G–code Group 11
@MDLG12 #4012 /: Modal G–code Group 12
@MDLG13 #4013 /: Modal G–code Group 13
@MDLG14 #4014 /: Modal G–code Group 14
@MDLG15 #4015 /: Modal G–code Group 15
@MDLG16 #4016 /: Modal G–code Group 16
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
43 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

@MDLG17 #4017 /: Modal G–code Group 17


@MDLG18 #4018 /: Modal G–code Group 18
@MDLG19 #4019 /: Modal G–code Group 19
@MDLG20 #4020 /: Modal G–code Group 20
@MDLG21 #4021 /: Modal G–code Group 21
@MDLG22 #4022 /: Modal G–code Group 22
@CORDF #4109 /: F cord
@CORDM #4113 /: M cord
@SEQNUM #4114 /: Sequece number
@PRGNUM #4115 /: Program number
@CORDS #4119 /: S cord
@CORDT #4120 /: T cord
/:
@ABSIO1 #5001 /: Block end position. 1’st
@ABSIO2 #5002 /: 2’nd
@ABSIO3 #5003
@ABSIO4 #5004
@ABSIO5 #5005
@ABSIO6 #5006
@ABSIO7 #5007
@ABSIO8 #5008
@ABSMT1 #5021 /: Machine Position.
@ABSMT2 #5022
@ABSMT3 #5023
@ABSMT4 #5024
@ABSMT5 #5025
@ABSMT6 #5026
@ABSMT7 #5027
@ABSMT8 #5028
@ABSOT1 #5041 /: Current absolute position.
@ABSOT2 #5042
@ABSOT3 #5043
@ABSOT4 #5044
@ABSOT5 #5045
@ABSOT6 #5046
@ABSOT7 #5047
@ABSOT8 #5048
@ABSKP1 #5061 /: Skip cutting position.
@ABSKP2 #5062
@ABSKP3 #5063
@ABSKP4 #5064
@ABSKP5 #5065
@ABSKP6 #5066
@ABSKP7 #5067
@ABSKP8 #5068
@OFSEXW1 #5201 /: AXIS 1 External workpiece reference offset.
@OFSEXW2 #5202 /: AXIS 2
@OFSEXW3 #5203 /: AXIS 3
@OFSEXW4 #5204 /: AXIS 4
@OFSEXW5 #5205 /: AXIS 5
@OFSEXW6 #5206 /: AXIS 6
@OFSEXW7 #5207 /: AXIS 7
@OFSEXW8 #5208 /: AXIS 8
@OFS54W1 #5221 /: AXIS 1 G54 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS54W2 #5222 /: AXIS 2
@OFS54W3 #5223 /: AXIS 3
@OFS54W4 #5224 /: AXIS 4
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
44 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@OFS54W5 #5225 /: AXIS 5


@OFS54W6 #5226 /: AXIS 6
@OFS54W7 #5227 /: AXIS 7
@OFS54W8 #5228 /: AXIS 8
@OFS55W1 #5241 /: AXIS 1 G55 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS55W2 #5242 /: AXIS 2
@OFS55W3 #5243 /: AXIS 3
@OFS55W4 #5244 /: AXIS 4
@OFS55W5 #5245 /: AXIS 5
@OFS55W6 #5246 /: AXIS 6
@OFS55W7 #5247 /: AXIS 7
@OFS55W8 #5248 /: AXIS 8
@OFS56W1 #5261 /: AXIS 1 G56 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS56W2 #5262 /: AXIS 2
@OFS56W3 #5263 /: AXIS 3
@OFS56W4 #5264 /: AXIS 4
@OFS56W5 #5265 /: AXIS 5
@OFS56W6 #5266 /: AXIS 6
@OFS56W7 #5267 /: AXIS 7
@OFS56W8 #5268 /: AXIS 8
@OFS57W1 #5281 /: AXIS 1 G57 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS57W2 #5282 /: AXIS 2
@OFS57W3 #5283 /: AXIS 3
@OFS57W4 #5284 /: AXIS 4
@OFS57W5 #5285 /: AXIS 5
@OFS57W6 #5286 /: AXIS 6
@OFS57W7 #5287 /: AXIS 7
@OFS57W8 #5288 /: AXIS 8
@OFS58W1 #5301 /: AXIS 1 G58 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS58W2 #5302 /: AXIS 2
@OFS58W3 #5303 /: AXIS 3
@OFS58W4 #5304 /: AXIS 4
@OFS58W5 #5305 /: AXIS 5
@OFS58W6 #5306 /: AXIS 6
@OFS58W7 #5307 /: AXIS 7
@OFS58W8 #5308 /: AXIS 8
@OFS59W1 #5321 /: AXIS 1 G59 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS59W2 #5322 /: AXIS 2
@OFS59W3 #5323 /: AXIS 3
@OFS59W4 #5324 /: AXIS 4
@OFS59W5 #5325 /: AXIS 5
@OFS59W6 #5326 /: AXIS 6
@OFS59W7 #5327 /: AXIS 7
@OFS59W8 #5328 /: AXIS 8
/:
/:
/: No.04 OTHER SYMBOL DEFINE.
/: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@ON =1
@OFF =0
/:
$LIST

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
45 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

D SYSTEM. DEF for series 15i0/16/18/20/21 (Possible to use this symbol definition evenby series 15B)
$NOLIST
/:
/: *************************************************************
/: * System common symbol define. *
/: * for series15i (V01.01 1999.07.21) *
/: *************************************************************
/:
/:
/: No.01 Control instruction code.
/: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@CALL M98P /: Sub program call.
@RETURN M99 /: Return to main program.
@RETURNP M99P /: Return to main program with sequence No.
/:
@ELASE G202 /: CRT erase.
@ELASEGR G202P1 /: Graphic erase.
@ELASECH G202P2 /: Charactor erase.
@ELASEAL G202P3 /: Graphic & Character erase.
/:
@COLOR G240 /: Display color select.
@BLACK G240P0 /: Black.
@RED G240P1 /: Red.
@GREEN G240P2 /: Green.
@YELLOW G240P3 /: Yellow.
@BLUE G240P4 /: Blue.
@PERPLE G240P5 /: Perple.
@SKYBL G240P6 /: Sky–blue.
@WHITE G240P7 /: White.
@REDR G240P–1 /: Reverse Red.
@GREENR G240P–2 /: Reverse Green.
@YELLOWR G240P–3 /: Reverse Yellow.
@BLUER G240P–4 /: Reverse Blue.
@PERPLER G240P–5 /: Reverse Perple.
@SKYBLR G240P–6 /: Reverse Sky–blue.
@WHITER G240P–7 /: Reverse White.
/:
@BON L1 /: Blink ON
@BOF L0 /: Blink OFF
/:
@ABSMOD G390 /: Absolute mode
@INCMOD G391 /: Incremental mode
/:
@CURSOR G230 /: Cursor display control.
@CLEN L /: cirsor length
/:
@DISPLAY G243 /: Character display.
@FORM F /: Format.
@DATA D /: Data.
@NSUP Z0 /: No Zero suppress.
@ZSUP Z1 /: Zero suppress.
/:
@KEYPRPT G280 /: Prompt display.
/:
@RECTNG G204 /: Rectangle display.
/:
@DRLINEK G244 /: Graphic Line kind select.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
46 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@DRSTART G242 /: Draw start point.


@DRLINE G301 /: Linear line display.
@DRCW G302 /: Circle display(CW).
@DRCCW G303 /: Circle display(CCW).
/:
@PMCDATA G310 /: PMC relay/data read and write.
@1BYTE L1 /: 1 BYTE
@2BYTE L2 /: 2 BYTE
@4BYTE L4 /: 4 BYTE
/:
@TRSVR G315 /: P–code variable transfer.
@TRSVRNML G315P001/: normal transfer.
@TRSVRUPT G315P002/: up transfer.
@TRSVRDWT G315P003/: down transfer.
@TRSVRARG G315P101/: transfer to arangement.
@TRSVRUPA G315P102/: up transfer to arangement.
@TRSVRDWA G315P103/: down transfer to arangement.
/:
@PAMAKE G370 /: CNC Prog. access. (Prog. make)
@PADELET G371 /: (Prog. delete)
@PAREAD G375 /: (Block read)
@PAWRITE G376 /: (Block write)
@PABDELT G377 /: (Block delete)
@PACREAD G328 /: (Character block read)
@PACWRIT G329 /: (Character block write)
/:
@RSOPEN G330 /: RS232C open.
@RSCLOSE G331 /: close.
@RSRECV G335 /: receive 1ch.
@RSSEND G336 /: Data send.
@RSVARRD G337 /: Variable data read.
@RSVARWT G338 /: Variable data write.
@RSFUNC G339 /: FANUC cassettee control.
/:
@PMAFEED G340 /: PMC AXIS feed.
@PMACUT G341 /: cutting.
@PMADWLL G344 /: dwell.
@PMAREFC G345 /: reference position return.
@PMAMSCL G346 /: miscellaneous function.
@PMASNRD G348 /: signal read.
@PMASNWT G349 /: signal write.
/:
/:
/: No.02 Conversation MACRO (TAIWA MACRO) control Variable define.
/: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@CMACRO1 #8500 /: Conversation MACRO – 1 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@AMACRO1 #8600 /: Auxliary MACRO–1 MAIN PROGRAM No.
@TAIWAP1 #8500
/:
@KEYCONT #8502 /: MDI–KEY IN CONTROL.
@NOREAD #8502=0 /: No Data read.
@NUMREAD #8502=1 /: Numeric Data read.
@ADRREAD #8502=2 /: Address+Numeric Data read.
@ASCREAD #8502=3 /: ASCII Data read.
/:
@KEYCODE #8501 /: MDI–KEY IN CODE.
@PAGEDW 1 /: ”Page Down” KEY pushed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
47 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

@PAGEUP 2 /: ”Page Up”


@CURUP 3 /: ”Cursor Up”
@CURDW 4 /: ”Cursor Down”
@CURLF 5 /: ”Cursor Left”
@CURRT 6 /: ”Cursor Right”
@INPUT 8 /: ”Input”
@RESET 10 /: ”Reset”
@SFTRT 11 /: ”Soft key right”
@SFT1 12 /: ”Soft key 1”
@SFT2 13 /: ”Soft key 2”
@SFT3 14 /: ”Soft key 3”
@SFT4 15 /: ”Soft key 4”
@SFT5 16 /: ”Soft key 5”
@SFT6 17 /: ”Soft key 6”
@SFT7 18 /: ”Soft key 7”
@SFT8 19 /: ”Soft key 8”
@SFT9 20 /: ”Soft key 9”
@SFT10 21 /: ”Soft key 10”
/:
@KEYDATA #8503 /: MDI–KEY IN DATA.
@KEYADRS #8504 /: MDI–KEY IN ADDRESS.
@KEYARRY #8552 /: MDI–KEY SPECIAL READ DATA VAR. No.
/:
@CHRPROG #8509 /: CHARACTER DEFINE PROGRAM No.
@CRTFUNC #8530 /: CRT FUNCTION CONTROL.
/:
@ARRY2BS #8512 /: Array CONTORL
@ARRY3BS #8513 /: Array CONTORL
@ARRY1CT #8516 /: Array CONTORL
@ARRY2CT #8517 /: Array CONTORL
@ARRYTOP #8519 /: Array CONTORL (Top variable No.)
/:
@TRNSDAT #8511 /: Transfer CONTORL
@TRNS2BS #8512 /: Transfer CONTORL
@TRNS3BS #8513 /: Transfer CONTORL
@TRNS2TO #8514 /: Transfer CONTORL
@TRNS3TO #8515 /: Transfer CONTORL
/:
@PAPROGN #8520 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (PROGRAM No.)
@PABLOKN #8521 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (BLOCK No.)
@PAVARNO #8522 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (DATA VAR. No.)
@PAPNTVN #8523 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (POINT DATA VAR. No.)
@PAERROR #8529 /: CNC PROG. ACCESS. (RETURN CODE)
/:
@PABGEDT #8526 /: BG–edit status.
@PAPGCNT #8527 /: Program count.
@PAFPMEM #8528 /: Free program memory.
/:
@RSERROR #8539 /: RS232C INTERFACE (RETURN CODE)
/:
@MDIKEYI0 #8540 /: MDI Key image
@MDIKEYI1 #8541 /: MDI Key image
@MDIKEYI2 #8542 /: MDI Key image
@MDIKEYI3 #8543 /: MDI Key image
@MDIKEYI4 #8544 /: MDI Key image
@MDIKEYI5 #8545 /: MDI Key image
@MDIKEYI6 #8546 /: MDI Key image
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
48 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@MDIKEYI7 #8547 /: MDI Key image


@MDIKEYI8 #8548 /: MDI Key image
@MDIKEYI9 #8549 /: MDI Key image
/:
@CUTTIME #8553 /: Cutting Time.
@CUTLENG #8554 /: Cutting length.
/:
@ITLCNTL #8605 /: Inter Lock control.
@ITLSTTS #8606 /: Skip signal movement direction.
/:
@PMGSLCT #8602 /: PMC AXIS select. (G–code control)
/:
@PCDWKNO #8610 /: P–code Work No. search.
/:
@TRQLTID #8990 /: Limited torque override ID.
@TRQWT 100 /: write.
@TRQRD 101 /: read.
@TRQLTAX #8991 /: axis no.
@TRQLTVL #8992 /: value.(0–255)
@TRQLTER #8993 /: return code.
/:
@CNVADID1 #8997 /: A/D converter ID1.
@ADGEN 400 /: general.
@ADSPDL 401 /: spindle.
@ADAXS 402 /: axis.
@CNVADID2 #8998 /: ID2.
@CNVADVAL #8999 /: value.
@CNVADERR #8996 /: return code.
/:
@MSKCLAX #8690 /: AXIS Macro call mask.
@MSKCLTC #8691 /: T code call mask.
/:
/:
/: No.03 System Variable.
/: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@EMPTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”.
@ENMTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”.
@ALARM #3000 /: Alarm display.
@TIMER1 #3001 /: Msec Timer.
@TIMER2 #3002 /: Hour Timer.
@SBKCNT #3003 /: Single blok/Auxilialy function control.
@FLDCNT #3004 /: Feed hold/Over ride control.
@MDLG01 #4001 /: Modal G–code Group 1
@MDLG02 #4002 /: Modal G–code Group 2
@MDLG03 #4003 /: Modal G–code Group 3
@MDLG04 #4004 /: Modal G–code Group 4
@MDLG05 #4005 /: Modal G–code Group 5
@MDLG06 #4006 /: Modal G–code Group 6
@MDLG07 #4007 /: Modal G–code Group 7
@MDLG08 #4008 /: Modal G–code Group 8
@MDLG09 #4009 /: Modal G–code Group 9
@MDLG10 #4010 /: Modal G–code Group 10
@MDLG11 #4011 /: Modal G–code Group 11
@MDLG12 #4012 /: Modal G–code Group 12
@MDLG13 #4013 /: Modal G–code Group 13
@MDLG14 #4014 /: Modal G–code Group 14
@MDLG15 #4015 /: Modal G–code Group 15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
49 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

@MDLG16 #4016 /: Modal G–code Group 16


@MDLG17 #4017 /: Modal G–code Group 17
@MDLG18 #4018 /: Modal G–code Group 18
@MDLG19 #4019 /: Modal G–code Group 19
@MDLG20 #4020 /: Modal G–code Group 20
@MDLG25 #4025 /: Modal G–code Group 25
@MDLG26 #4026 /: Modal G–code Group 26
@CORDF #4109 /: F cord
@CORDM #4113 /: M cord
@SEQNUM #4114 /: Sequece number
@PRGNUM #4115 /: Program number
@CORDS #4119 /: S cord
@CORDT #4120 /: T cord
/:
@ABSIO1 #5001 /: Block end position. 1’st
@ABSIO2 #5002 /: 2’nd
@ABSIO3 #5003
@ABSIO4 #5004
@ABSIO5 #5005
@ABSIO6 #5006
@ABSIO7 #5007
@ABSIO8 #5008
@ABSIO9 #5009
@ABSI10 #5010
@ABSMT1 #5021 /: Machine Position.
@ABSMT2 #5022
@ABSMT3 #5023
@ABSMT4 #5024
@ABSMT5 #5025
@ABSMT6 #5026
@ABSMT7 #5027
@ABSMT8 #5028
@ABSMT9 #5029
@ABSMT10 #5030
@ABSOT1 #5041 /: Current absolute position.
@ABSOT2 #5042
@ABSOT3 #5043
@ABSOT4 #5044
@ABSOT5 #5045
@ABSOT6 #5046
@ABSOT7 #5047
@ABSOT8 #5048
@ABSOT9 #5049
@ABSOT10 #5050
@ABSKP1 #5061 /: Skip cutting position.
@ABSKP2 #5062
@ABSKP3 #5063
@ABSKP4 #5064
@ABSKP5 #5065
@ABSKP6 #5066
@ABSKP7 #5067
@ABSKP8 #5068
@ABSKP9 #5069
@ABSKP10 #5070
@OFSEXW1 #5201 /: AXIS 1 External workpiece reference offset.
@OFSEXW2 #5202 /: AXIS 2
@OFSEXW3 #5203 /: AXIS 3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
50 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@OFSEXW4 #5204 /: AXIS 4


@OFSEXW5 #5205 /: AXIS 5
@OFSEXW6 #5206 /: AXIS 6
@OFSEXW7 #5207 /: AXIS 7
@OFSEXW8 #5208 /: AXIS 8
@OFSEXW9 #5209 /: AXIS 9
@OFSEXW10 #5210 /: AXIS 10
@OFS54W1 #5221 /: AXIS 1 G54 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS54W2 #5222 /: AXIS 2
@OFS54W3 #5223 /: AXIS 3
@OFS54W4 #5224 /: AXIS 4
@OFS54W5 #5225 /: AXIS 5
@OFS54W6 #5226 /: AXIS 6
@OFS54W7 #5227 /: AXIS 7
@OFS54W8 #5228 /: AXIS 8
@OFS54W9 #5229 /: AXIS 9
@OFS54W10 #5230 /: AXIS10
@OFS55W1 #5241 /: AXIS 1 G55 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS55W2 #5242 /: AXIS 2
@OFS55W3 #5243 /: AXIS 3
@OFS55W4 #5244 /: AXIS 4
@OFS55W5 #5245 /: AXIS 5
@OFS55W6 #5246 /: AXIS 6
@OFS55W7 #5247 /: AXIS 7
@OFS55W8 #5248 /: AXIS 8
@OFS55W9 #5249 /: AXIS 9
@OFS55W10 #5250 /: AXIS10
@OFS56W1 #5261 /: AXIS 1 G56 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS56W2 #5262 /: AXIS 2
@OFS56W3 #5263 /: AXIS 3
@OFS56W4 #5264 /: AXIS 4
@OFS56W5 #5265 /: AXIS 5
@OFS56W6 #5266 /: AXIS 6
@OFS56W7 #5267 /: AXIS 7
@OFS56W8 #5268 /: AXIS 8
@OFS56W9 #5269 /: AXIS 9
@OFS56W10 #5270 /: AXIS10
@OFS57W1 #5281 /: AXIS 1 G57 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS57W2 #5282 /: AXIS 2
@OFS57W3 #5283 /: AXIS 3
@OFS57W4 #5284 /: AXIS 4
@OFS57W5 #5285 /: AXIS 5
@OFS57W6 #5286 /: AXIS 6
@OFS57W7 #5287 /: AXIS 7
@OFS57W8 #5288 /: AXIS 8
@OFS57W9 #5289 /: AXIS 9
@OFS57W10 #5290 /: AXIS10
@OFS58W1 #5301 /: AXIS 1 G58 workpiece reference offset.
@OFS58W2 #5302 /: AXIS 2
@OFS58W3 #5303 /: AXIS 3
@OFS58W4 #5304 /: AXIS 4
@OFS58W5 #5305 /: AXIS 5
@OFS58W6 #5306 /: AXIS 6
@OFS58W7 #5307 /: AXIS 7
@OFS58W8 #5308 /: AXIS 8
@OFS58W9 #5309 /: AXIS 9
@OFS58W10 #5310 /: AXIS10
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
51 inform us,we will delete
A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION
(\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

@OFS59W1 #5321 /: AXIS 1 G59 workpiece reference offset.


@OFS59W2 #5322 /: AXIS 2
@OFS59W3 #5323 /: AXIS 3
@OFS59W4 #5324 /: AXIS 4
@OFS59W5 #5325 /: AXIS 5
@OFS59W6 #5326 /: AXIS 6
@OFS59W7 #5327 /: AXIS 7
@OFS59W8 #5328 /: AXIS 8
@OFS59W9 #5329 /: AXIS 9
@OFS59W10 #5330 /: AXIS10
/:
/:
/: No.04 OTHER SYMBOL DEFINE.
/: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@ON =1
@OFF =0
/:
$LIST

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
52 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE

B COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE

The table below indicates the error codes that may occur in compile
processing.
Compile Error Codes (1/3)
Error code Meaning
0000 Normal termination
0201 Too many programs
0202 There is no program.
1001 Block delete number contains decimal point.
1002 Block delete number other than 1 to 9 is coded.
1003 Program number is coded not at start of program.
1004 Sequence number is coded not at start of block.
1005 NC statement has format error.
1006 Code other than EOB is present at end of macro statement.
1007 Equal sign cannot be found with macro statement.
1008 DO nesting depth exceeded 3 levels.
1009 Relation operator cannot be found in conditional expression.
100a IF is not followed by GOTO.
100b Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for IF[<conditional-expres-
sion>].
100c GOTO n is followed by code other than EOB.
100d DO m is followed by code other than EOB.
100e END m is followed by code other than EOB.
100f Identification number of END does not match DO.
1010 END to match DO cannot be found.
1011 WHILE is not followed by DO.
1012 Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for WHILE[<conditional-ex-
pression>].
1013 Block not identifiable as NC statement or macro statement is
present.
1014 DO to match END cannot be found.
1015 Program number of directory does not match program number
in program.
1016 Program number is missing at start of program.
1017 Error in the IF [...] THEN part
1018 Error in the SETVN statement
1019 Error in DEFADD
101a Error in the POPEN command
101b Error in the PCLOS command
101c Error in the BPRNT command
101d Error in the DPRNT command
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
53 inform us,we will delete
B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Compile Error Codes (2/3)


Error code Meaning
101e Error in the PGN command
101f Error in the FDEL command
1020 Error in the FOPEN command
1021 Error in the FCLOS command
1022 Error in the FREAD command
1023 Error in the FWRITE command
1024 Error in the FPSET command
1025 Too many IF [...] THEN parts
1027 ”ccall” not followed by EOB code
1028 The multiplicity of IF [...] THEN parts exceeds 3.
1029 AND and OR conditions in the IF [...] part
1030 ”ENDIF” not found for the IF [...] THEN part
1031 More than four ANDs or ORs
1033 The number of ”ELSEs” does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.
1034 The number of ”ENDIFs” does not match that of IF [...] THEN
parts.
1035 The number of ”THENs” does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.
1201 Nesting depth of parentheses exceeded 5 levels.
1202 Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for #[<expression>].
1203 Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for [<expression>].
1204 Second opening bracket ([) cannot be found for ATAN[<expres-
sion>]/[<expression>].
1205 Slash (/) cannot be found for ATAN[<expression>]/[<expres-
sion>].
1206 First closing bracket (]) cannot be found for ATAN[<expres-
sion>]/[<expression>].
1207 Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for function [<expression>].
1208 Format of <expression> contains error.
1209 Format of <expression> on left side of assignment statement
contains error.
120a Format of <expression> in <address>[<expression>], <ad-
dress>-[<expression>], or GOTO[<expression>] contains error.
120b Error in the array
1401 Numeric value longer than 8 digits is present.
1402 Decimal point is followed by code other than number.
1403 Macro variable number is longer than 6 digits.
1404 # is not immediately followed by number or opening bracket ([).
1405 Program number is longer than 4 digits.
1406 Sequence number is longer than 4 digits.
1407 Opening bracket ([) cannot be found for function [<expres-
sion>].
1408 Opening bracket ([) cannot be found for IF[<expression>] or
WHILE[<expression>].
1409 Number m in DO m or END m is longer than 1 digit.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
54 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE

Compile Error Codes (3/3)


Error code Meaning
140a Number m in DO m or END m is not number from 1 to 3.
140b DO or END is followed by code other than number.
140c Alphabetic character string not identifiable as control command
or function are present.
140d Alphabetic character string longer than 5 characters is present.
140e EOR is missing at end of program.
140f Code not usable in program is present.
1410 Character string is longer than 255 characters.
1411 Internal code is longer than 4 characters.
1412 Internal code is not represented in hexadecimal.
1413 Internal code that cannot be represented is specified.
1414 Character string command starting with (* does not end with *).
1415 Pair of parentheses contains unallowable character.
1416 Unusable character found between ”,” and ”;”
1417 Unusable character found between ”@” and ”@”
1418 Error in the ”@” and ”@” specification
1419 Hexadecimal code exceeding two digits
1420 Error in the characters or length of a hexadecimal character string
1421 ’0’ or ’N’ not followed by a digit
1601 Temporary variable area used for executor is insufficient.
NC statement of 1 block includes too many addresses contain-
ing <expression>.
1602 GOTO destination is to great. Set jump destination for 4-byte
output with parameter, or reduce program.
1603 NC statement of 1 block contains more than 50 addresses.
1604 Macro variable number is longer than 6 digits.
1605 Macro variable number is negative.
1606 Macro variable number contains decimal point.
1607 Number after GOTO is longer than 4 digits.
1608 Number after GOTO contains decimal point.
1681 One program contains more than 200 GOTO statements speci-
fying sequence numbers directly.
1682 Sequence number for GOTO destination cannot be found.
1683 One program contains more than 100 WHILE statements.
1684 Multiple sequence numbers are present for GOTO destination.
1801 ROM cassette overflowed.
1900 ”%” not found or not correct
2000 Press the RESET button.
2001 Unable to read an NC program
8000 Error in a program number
8001 Unable to convert ASCII codes
9999 missmatch err_code !!

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
55 inform us,we will delete
C. ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION
PARAMETER TABLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

C ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE

Cassette type –K1xx –K2xx –IDxxxx –VCxx –VPxx –Pxx


Series 0 64Kbyte –K110 –K223 –ID40B0 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 0 128Kbyte –K110 –K226 –ID50B0 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 0 256Kbyte –K110 –K223 –ID40B1 –VCC0 –VP64 –P01
Series 0 512Kbyte –K110 –K223 –ID50B2 –VCC0 –VP64 –P01
Series 0 1M byte –K110 –K223 –ID40B2 –VCC0 –VP64 –P01
Series 15 256Kbyte –K110 –K223 –ID60BD –VCC0 –VP64 –P01
Series 15 512Kbyte –K110 –K223 –ID80BD –VCC0 –VP64 –P01
Series 16A 256Kbyte –K111 –K230 –IDFFF4 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 16A 512Kbyte –K111 –K230 –IDFFF3 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 16A 1M byte –K111 –K230 –IDFFF2 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 16A 2M byte –K111 –K231 –IDFFF1 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 18A 128Kbyte –K110 –K230 –IDFFF5 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 18A 256Kbyte –K110 –K230 –IDFFF4 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 18A 512Kbyte –K110 –K230 –IDFFF3 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 18A 1M byte –K110 –K230 –IDFFF2 Omitted Omitted Omitted
Series 18A 2M byte –K110 –K231 –IDFFF1 Omitted Omitted Omitted

Example 1)
A Series 0 128K-byte ROM cassette is written to and verified.

A:\> MRO WT SAMPL.ROM –K110 –K226 –ID50B0 –VF

Example 2)
A Series 15 512K-byte ROM cassette is written to and verified.
A:\> MROMWT SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K221 -ID80BD -VCC0-VP64 -P01 -VF

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
56 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

D COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

The compile/link example described below is created under the directory

X:\MCOMP\USR\SAMPL

when the macro compiler utility system is installed.

Details of sample:
Times required for instruction execution by each of the conversational
macros are measured:
1. #100 = #101+#102 ;
2. #100 = #101 AND #102 ;
3. #100 = SIN[#101] ;

The number of test operations is set beforehand in the common variable


(#500). Time required for looping by the number of test operations by the
WHILE instruction is measured by the timer variable (#3001). Then time
required for the same number of loops by the WHILE instruction
containing an instruction subject to measurement is measured. Thus the
difference between two measurement times is the execution time of the
instruction subject to measurement.
(1) Programs created
File name = MAIN.SRC Main source program file
File name = SUB1.SRC Subprogram source file

File name = MAIN.REF Main program reference list file


File name = MAIN.LST Main program compile list file
File name = MAIN.REL Main program object file
File name = SUB1.REF Subprogram reference list file
File name = SUB1.LST Subprogram compile list file
File name = SUB1.REL Subprogram object file

(2) Macro liner

File name = SAMPL.LNK Link control file


File name = SAMPL.MAP Link map list file
File name = SAMPL.ROM ROM-format file

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
57 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Main program source file File name : MAIN.SRC

/:
/: SAMPLE Program.
/:
/: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program.
/: (Vol 01.01 1997.03.14)
/:
/:
/: ( MAIN Program )
/:
/:
/: Symbol define.
/:
/: System common symbole FILE Include.
/:
$INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
/:
/:
@LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count.
@TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save.
@TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save.
/:
/:
@COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work.
@WORK #100 /: Work regster.
/:
/:
>LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define.
>FIN 999
/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/: No. O1000 : Main program.
/:
O1000 ;
NUMREAD ; Numeric data input.
CURSOR OFF ³ Delete this line in Series15. ; Cursol OFF
DISPLAY X0 Y0 B0 (’EXECUTION TIME TEST’) ; ”MENU” display.
X2 Y2 (’1.#101=#102+#103’) ;
X2 Y3 (’2.#101=#102 AND #103’);
X2 Y4 (’3.#101=SIN[#102]’) ;
;
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (SELECT TEST NO.) ;
IF [KEYCODE NE INPUT]GOTO FIN ; ”INPUT” key push ?
IF [KEYDATA LT 1]GOTO FIN ; 0 < DATA < 3 chk.
IF [KEYDATA GT 3]GOTO FIN ;
; No-ope. Time GET.
COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set.
TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize.
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ;
COUNT = COUNT -1 ; No-operation loop.
END1 ;

TIMESAV = TIMER1 ; Sample time save.


;
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
58 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

TAIWAP1 = KEYDATA*100+1000 ; Jump To TEST progra.


; O1x00:x=key in data.
;
FIN RETURNP LOOP ; END of conv. MACRO.
/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/:
/: No. O1001 : Answer display sub program.
/:
/: LOOPCT : TEST Loop count.
/: TIMESAV : No-operatinon Time.
/: TSTTIME : Measured Time.
/:
O1001 ;
DISPLAY X5 Y4 B0 (SANPLE COUNTER) ; Loop count display.
X20 Y4 FORM 6 ZSUP DATA LOOPCT ;
;
X5 Y6 (TOTAL TIME) ; Total measuer Time
X20 Y6 DATA [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] K1 (MSEC); display.
;
WORK = [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] / LOOPCT ; 1 operation Time
X5 Y8 (ONE OPERATION) ; display.
X20 Y8 FORM 5.2 DATA WORK K1 (MSEC) ;
;
RETURN ; Return to main.
/:
/:
%

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
59 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Main program reference list file File name : MAIN.REF

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:3 Page 1


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01 MAIN.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------

---------- Program ---------------------------------------------------

S-Line G-Line
1 /:
2 /: SAMPLE Program.
3 /:
4 /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program.
5 /: (Vol 01.01 1997.03.14)
6 /:
7 /:
8 /: ( MAIN Program )
9 /:
10 /:
11 /: Symbol define.
12 /:
13 /: System common symbole FILE Include.
14 /:
15 $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
16 $NOLIST
203 /:
204 /:
205 @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count.
206 @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save.
207 @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save.
208 /:
209 /:
210 @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work.
211 @WORK #100 /: Work regster.
212 /:
213 /:
214 >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define.
215 >FIN 999
216 /:
217 /:
218 $EJECT

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
60 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:3 Page 2


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01 MAIN.SRC

S-Line G-Line
219 /:
220 /: No. O1000 : Main program.
221 /:
222 0001 O1000 ;
223 0002 NUMREAD ;
Numeric data input.
224 0003 CURSOR OFF ;
Cursol OFF
225 0004 DISPLAY X0 Y0 B0 (’EXECUTION TIME TEST’) ;
”MENU” display.
226 0005 X2 Y2 (’1.#101=#102+#103’) ;
227 0006 X2 Y3 (’2.#101=#102 AND #103’);
228 0007 X2 Y4 (’3.#101=SIN[#102]’) ;
229 0008 ;
230 0009 LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (SELECT TEST NO.) ;
231 0010 IF [KEYCODE NE INPUT]GOTO FIN ;
”INPUT” key push ?
232 0011 IF [KEYDATA LT 1]GOTO FIN ;
0 < DATA < 3 chk.
233 0012 IF [KEYDATA GT 3]GOTO FIN ;
234 0013 ;
No-ope. Time GET.
235 0014 COUNT = LOOPCT ;
Loop counter set.
236 0015 TIMER1 = 0 ;
Timer initialize.
237 0016 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ;
238 0017 COUNT = COUNT -1 ;
No-operation loop.
239 0018 END1 ;
240 0019 TIMESAV = TIMER1 ;
Sample time save.
241 0020 ;
242 0021 TAIWAP1 = KEYDATA*100+1000 ;
Jump To TEST progra.
243 0022 ;
O1x00:x=key in data.
244 0023 ;
245 0024 FIN RETURNP LOOP ;
END of conv. MACRO.
246 /:
247 /:
248 $EJECT

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
61 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4 Page 3


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01 MAIN.SRC

S-Line G-Line
249 /:
250 /:
251 /: No. O1001 : Answer display sub program.
252 /:
253 /: LOOPCT : TEST Loop count.
254 /: TIMESAV : No-operatinon Time.
255 /: TSTTIME : Measured Time.
256 /:
257 0025 O1001 ;
258 0026 DISPLAY X5 Y4 B0 (SANPLE COUNTER) ;
Loop count display.
259 0027 X20 Y4 FORM 6 ZSUP DATA LOOPCT ;
260 0028 ;
261 0029 X5 Y6 (TOTAL TIME) ;
Total measuer Time
262 0030 X20 Y6 DATA [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] K1 (MSEC); display.
263 0031 ;
264 0032 WORK = [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] / LOOPCT ;
1 operation Time
265 0033 X5 Y8 (ONE OPERATION) ; display.
266 0034 X20 Y8 FORM 5.2 DATA WORK K1 (MSEC) ;
267 0035 ;
268 0036 RETURN ;
Return to main.
269 /:
270 /:
271 0037 %

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
62 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4 Page 4


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01 MAIN.SRC

---------- Cross Reference -------------------------------------------

Symbol Define Line No.


RETURN M99 268
RETURNP M99P 245
DISPLAY G243 225, 230, 258
FORM F 259, 266
DATA D 259, 262, 266
ZSUP Z1 259
TAIWAP1 #8500 242
NUMREAD #8502=1 223
KEYCODE #8501 231
INPUT 8 231
KEYDATA #8503 232, 233, 242
CURSOR #8505 224
TIMER1 #3001 236, 240
OFF =0 224
LOOPCT #500 235, 259, 264
TIMESAV #501 240, 262, 264
TSTTIME #502 262, 264
COUNT #100 235, 237, 238, 238
WORK #100 264, 266
LOOP 100 230, 245
FIN 999 231, 232, 233, 245

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
63 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Main program compile list file File name : MAIN.LST


-----------------------------------

14-Mar-1997 16:27:43 Page 1


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01 MAIN.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------

---------- program O1000 ---------------------------------------------

G-Line P-Line
0001 1 O1000;
0002 2 #8502=1;
0003 3 #8505=0;
0004 4 G243X0Y0B0(*0045 0058 0045 0043 0055 0054 0049 004F004E 0020 0054 0049
004D 0045 0020 0054 0045 0053 0054*);
0005 5 X2Y2(*0031 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 002B 0023
0031 0030 0033*);
0006 6 X2Y3(*0032 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 0020 0041
004E 0044 0020 0023 0031 0030 0033*);
0007 7 X2Y4(*0033 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0053 0049 004E 005B 0023 0031
0030 0032 005D*);
0008 8 ;
0009 9 N100G243X8Y11B1(SELECT TEST NO.);
0010 10 IF[#8501NE8]GOTO999;
0011 11 IF[#8503LT1]GOTO999;
0012 12 IF[#8503GT3]GOTO999;
0013 13 ;
0014 14 #100=#500;
0015 15 #3001=0;
0016 16 WHILE[#100GT0]DO1;
0017 17 #100=#100-1;
0018 18 END1;
0019 19 #501=#3001;
0020 20 ;
0021 21 #8500=#8503*100+1000;
0022 22 ;
0023 23 ;
0024 24 N999M99P100;

----------------------------------------------------------------------

0 errors, 24 blocks, 24 total lines

program size = 250 bytes

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
64 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

14-Mar-1997 16:27:46 Page 2


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01 MAIN.SRC

---------- Cross Reference -------------------------------------------

#100 : 14, 16, 17, 17,


#500 : 14,
#501 : 19,
#3001 : 15, 19,
#8500 : 21,
#8501 : 10,
#8502 : 2,
#8503 : 11, 12, 21,
#8505 : 3,

14-Mar-1997 16:27:46 Page 3


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01 MAIN.SRC

---------- program O1001 ---------------------------------------------

G-Line P-Line
0025 1 O1001;
0026 2 G243X5Y4B0(SANPLE COUNTER);
0027 3 X20Y4F6Z1D#500;
0028 4 ;
0029 5 X5Y6(TOTAL TIME);
0030 6 X20Y6D[#502-#501]K1(MSEC);
0031 7 ;
0032 8 #100=[#502-#501]/#500;
0033 9 X5Y8(ONE OPERATION);
0034 10 X20Y8F5.2D#100K1(MSEC);
0035 11 ;
0036 12 M99;
0037 13 %

----------------------------------------------------------------------

0 errors, 13 blocks, 13 total lines

program size = 145 bytes


14-Mar-1997 16:27:47 Page 4
(F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01 MAIN.SRC

---------- Cross Reference -------------------------------------------

#100 : 8, 10,
#500 : 3, 8,
#501 : 6, 8,
#502 : 6, 8,

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
65 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Subprogram source file File name : SUB1.SRC

/:
/: SAMPLE Program.
/:
/: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program.
/: (Vol 01.01 1997.03.14)
/:
/:
/: ( SUB Program )
/:
/:
/: Symbol define.
/:
/: System common symbole FILE Include.
/:
$INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
/:
/:
@LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count.
@TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save.
@TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save.
/:
/:
@COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work.
@MAINPR 1000 /: MAIN Program No.
@DISPSUB 1001 /: Answer display SUB Program.
/:
/:
>LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define.
>FIN 999
/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/:
/: (#101=#102+#103) Operation Time Test.
/:
/: No. O1100 : SUB program.
/:
/:
O1100 ;
NOREAD ; NO data read.
;
DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102+#103 TEST’) ; Operation code disp.
;
COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set.
TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize.
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ;
#101 = #102 + #103 ; (Time Measure)
COUNT = COUNT -1 ;
END1 ;
;
TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save.
CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
66 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

;
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ;
IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; ”RESET” key wait.
RETURNP LOOP ;
;
FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ;
RETURN ;
/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/:
/: (#101=#102 AND #103) Operation Time Test.
/:
/: No. O1200 : SUB program.
/:
/:
O1200 ;
NOREAD ; NO data read.
;
DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102 AND #103 TEST’); Operation code disp.
;
COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set.
TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize.
WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ;
#101 = #102 AND #103 ; (Time Measure)
COUNT = COUNT -1 ;
END1 ;
;
TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save.
;
CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp.
;
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ;
IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; ”RESET” key wait.
RETURNP LOOP ;
;
FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ;
RETURN ;
/:
/:
$EJECT
/:
/:
/: (#101=SIN[#102]) Operation Time Test.
/:
/: No. O1300 : SUB program.
/:
/:
O1300 ;
NOREAD ; NO data read.
;
DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=SIN[#102]’) ; Operation code disp.

;
COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set.
TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
67 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ;
#101 = SIN[#102] ; (Time Measure)
COUNT = COUNT -1 ;
END1 ;
;
TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save.
;
CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp.
;
LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ;
IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; ”RESET” key wait.
RETURNP LOOP ;
;
FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ;
RETURN ;
%

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
68 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

Subprogram reference list file File name :SUB1.REF


--------------------------------------

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4 Page 1


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01 SUB1.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------

---------- Program ---------------------------------------------------

S-Line G-Line
1 /:
2 /: SAMPLE Program.
3 /:
4 /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program.
5 /: (Vol 01.01 1997.03.14)
6 /:
7 /:
8 /: ( SUB Program )
9 /:
10 /:
11 /: Symbol define.
12 /:
13 /: System common symbole FILE Include.
14 /:
15 pINCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF
16 pNOLIST
203 /:
204 /:
205 @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count.
206 @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save.
207 @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save.
208 /:
209 /:
210 @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work.
211 @MAINPR 1000 /: MAIN Program No.
212 @DISPSUB 1001 /: Answer display SUB Program.
213 /:
214 /:
215 >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define.
216 >FIN 999
217 /:
218 /:
219 $EJECT

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
69 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:4 Page 2


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01 SUB1.SRC

S-Line G-Line
220 /:
221 /:
222 /: (#101=#102+#103) Operation Time Test.
223 /:
224 /: No. O1100 : SUB program.
225 /:
226 /:
227 0001 O1100 ;
228 0002 NOREAD ; NO data read.
229 0003 ;
230 0004 DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102+#103 TEST’) ; Operation code disp.
231 0005 ;
232 0006 COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set.
233 0007 TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize.
234 0008 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ;
235 0009 #101 = #102 + #103 ; (Time Measure)
236 0010 COUNT = COUNT -1 ;
237 0011 END1 ;
238 0012 ;
239 0013 TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save.
240 0014 ;
241 0015 CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp.
242 0016 ;
243 0017 LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ;
244 0018 IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; ”RESET” key wait.
245 0019 RETURNP LOOP ;
246 0020 ;
247 0021 FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ;
248 0022 RETURN ;
249 /:
250 /:
251 $EJECT

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
70 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:5 Page 3


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01 SUB1.SRC

S-Line G-Line
252 /:
253 /:
254 /: (#101=#102 AND #103) Operation Time Test.
255 /:
256 /: No. O1200 : SUB program.
257 /:
258 /:
259 0023 O1200 ;
260 0024 NOREAD ; NO data read.
261 0025 ;
262 0026 DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102 AND #103 TEST’); Operation code disp.
263 0027 ;
264 0028 COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set.
265 0029 TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize.
266 0030 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ;
267 0031 #101 = #102 AND #103 ; (Time Measure)
268 0032 COUNT = COUNT -1 ;
269 0033 END1 ;
270 0034 ;
271 0035 TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save.
272 0036 ;
273 0037 CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp.
274 0038 ;
275 0039 LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ;
276 0040 IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; ”RESET” key wait.
277 0041 RETURNP LOOP ;
278 0042 ;
279 0043 FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ;
280 0044 RETURN ;
281 /:
282 /:
283 $EJECT

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
71 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:5 Page 4


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01 SUB1.SRC

S-Line G-Line
284 /:
285 /:
286 /: (#101=SIN[#102]) Operation Time Test.
287 /:
288 /: No. O1300 : SUB program.
289 /:
290 /:
291 0045 O1300 ;
292 0046 NOREAD ; NO data read.
293 0047 ;
294 0048 DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=SIN[#102]’) ; Operation code disp.
295 0049 ;
296 0050 COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set.
297 0051 TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize.
298 0052 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ;
299 0053 #101 = SIN[#102] ; (Time Measure)
300 0054 COUNT = COUNT -1 ;
301 0055 END1 ;
302 0056 ;
303 0057 TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save.
304 0058 ;
305 0059 CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp.
306 0060 ;
307 0061 LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ;
308 0062 IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; ”RESET” key wait.
309 0063 RETURNP LOOP ;
310 0064 ;
311 0065 FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ;
312 0066 RETURN ;
313 0067 %

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
72 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:5 Page 5


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01 SUB1.SRC

---------- Cross Reference -------------------------------------------

Symbol Define Line No.


CALL M98P 241, 273, 305
RETURN M99 248, 280, 312
RETURNP M99P 245, 277, 309
DISPLAY G243 230, 243, 262, 275, 294,
307
TAIWAP1 #8500 247, 279, 311
NOREAD #8502=0 228, 260, 292
KEYCODE #8501 244, 276, 308
RESET 10 244, 276, 308
TIMER1 #3001 233, 239, 265, 271, 297,
303
LOOPCT #500 232, 264, 296
TSTTIME #502 239, 271, 303
COUNT #100 232, 234, 236, 236, 264,
266, 268, 268, 296, 298,
300, 300
MAINPR 1000 247, 279, 311
DISPSUB 1001 241, 273, 305
LOOP 100 243, 245, 275, 277, 307,
309
FIN 999 244, 247, 276, 279, 308,
311

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
73 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Subprogram compile list file File name : SUB1.LST

14-Mar-1997 16:27:57 Page 1


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01 SUB1.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------

---------- program O1100 ---------------------------------------------

G-Line P-Line
0001 1 O1100;
0002 2 #8502=0;
0003 3 ;
0004 4 G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 002B 0023 0031
0030 0033 0020 0054 0045 0053 0054*);
0005 5 ;
0006 6 #100=#500;
0007 7 #3001=0;
0008 8 WHILE[#100GT0]DO1;
0009 9 #101=#102+#103;
0010 10 #100=#100-1;
0011 11 END1;
0012 12 ;
0013 13 #502=#3001;
0014 14 ;
0015 15 M98P1001;
0016 16 ;
0017 17 N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY);
0018 18 IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999;
0019 19 M99P100;
0020 20 ;
0021 21 N999#8500=1000;
0022 22 M99;

----------------------------------------------------------------------

0 errors, 22 blocks, 22 total lines

program size = 163 bytes

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
74 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

---------- Cross Reference -------------------------------------------

#100 : 6, 8, 10, 10,


#101 : 9,
#102 : 9,
#103 : 9,
#500 : 6,
#502 : 13,
#3001 : 7, 13,
#8500 : 21,
#8501 : 18,
#8502 : 2,

14-Mar-1997 16:27:59 Page 3


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01 SUB1.SRC

---------- program O1200 ---------------------------------------------

G-Line P-Line
0023 1 O1200;
0024 2 #8502=0;
0025 3 ;
0026 4 G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 0020 0041 004E
0044 0020 0023 0031 0030 0033 0020 0054 0045 0053
0054*);
0027 5 ;
0028 6 #100=#500;
0029 7 #3001=0;
0030 8 WHILE[#100GT0]DO1;
0031 9 #101=#102AND#103;
0032 10 #100=#100-1;
0033 11 END1;
0034 12 ;
0035 13 #502=#3001;
0036 14 ;
0037 15 M98P1001;
0038 16 ;
0039 17 N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY);
0040 18 IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999;
0041 19 M99P100;
0042 20 ;
0043 21 N999#8500=1000;
0044 22 M99;

----------------------------------------------------------------------

0 errors, 22 blocks, 22 total lines

program size = 167 bytes

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
75 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

---------- Cross Reference -------------------------------------------

#100 : 6, 8, 10, 10,


#101 : 9,
#102 : 9,
#103 : 9,
#500 : 6,
#502 : 13,
#3001 : 7, 13,
#8500 : 21,
#8501 : 18,
#8502 : 2,

14-Mar-1997 16:28:01 Page 5


(F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01 SUB1.SRC

---------- program O1300 ---------------------------------------------

G-Line P-Line
0045 1 O1300;
0046 2 #8502=0;
0047 3 ;
0048 4 G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0053 0049 004E 005B 0023 0031 0030
0032 005D*);
0049 5 ;
0050 6 #100=#500;
0051 7 #3001=0;
0052 8 WHILE[#100GT0]DO1;
0053 9 #101=SIN[#102];
0054 10 #100=#100-1;
0055 11 END1;
0056 12 ;
0057 13 #502=#3001;
0058 14 ;
0059 15 M98P1001;
0060 16 ;
0061 17 N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY);
0062 18 IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999;
0063 19 M99P100;
0064 20 ;
0065 21 N999#8500=1000;
0066 22 M99;
0067 23 %

----------------------------------------------------------------------

0 errors, 23 blocks, 23 total lines

program size = 156 bytes

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
76 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

---------- Cross Reference -------------------------------------------

#100 : 6, 8, 10, 10,


#101 : 9,
#102 : 9,
#500 : 6,
#502 : 13,
#3001 : 7, 13,
#8500 : 21,
#8501 : 18,
#8502 : 2,

Link control file File name : SAMPL.LNK


--------------------------------------

/:
/: Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file.
/: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
/:
/: Library file ’FS0-MC’
/:
CNC=\MCOMP\MEX\F0MC_07.MEX
/:
/: compile parameter P9000 - P9009 and P9010 - P9059
/:
P9000=10000010
P9001=00000001
P9002=00100000
P9003=00000001
P9037=5
P9038=1000
/:
/: Link file’s
/:
FILE=MAIN
FILE=SUB1
/:

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
77 inform us,we will delete
D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Link map list file File name : SAMPL.MAP


--------------------------------------

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:28:3 Page 1


Macro Linker V01.01
SAMPL.MAP

---------- Library List ------------------------------------------------

NO FILE NAME LIBRARY NAME

1 \MCOMP\MEX\F0MC_07.MEX 0-MC MACRO


LIBRARY

---------- Compile Parameter -------------------------------------------

P9000 = 10000010
P9001 = 00000001
P9002 = 00100000
P9003 = 00000001
P9037 = 5
P9038 = 1000

---------- Object List -------------------------------------------------

FILE NAME PROG SIZE

MAIN.REL 01000 0000FAH


01001 000091H
SUB1.REL 01100 0000A3H
01200 0000A7H
01300 00009CH

---------- ROM FILE SIZE -----------------------------------------------

SIZE = 10000H ( 64KB )

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
78 inform us,we will delete
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION
GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR

E THE FANUC Series 16/18 Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
79 inform us,we will delete
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION
GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
Super CAP M/Super CAP II M APPENDIX B–66102E/10

E.1 Appendix E describes how to operate the tool for supporting the
conversational automatic programming function (Super CAP M/Super
INTRODUCTION CAP II M) for milling machines.
The user can convert conversational programming menu definition
programs together with other macro programs to ROM-format files in a
personal computer using the procedure below:
The procedures for creating a ROM file and MEM file for Super CAP M
or Super CAP II M are described below.
(1) Create the following menu definition programs with an editor.
D Menu definition program
D Conversational data definition program
D Data item display program
(2) Convert a source file to the table data file in the Super CAP/Super
CAP II M table format using the macro converter (MCONV).
Example: MCONV JZH_PARA
JZH_PARA: Name of source program file for table data
(3) Compile the source programs to object files using the macro compiler
(MCOMPO).
Example: MCOMPO MACHINE
MACHINE: Source program file name
(4) Use the macro linker (MLINK) to convert the object and table data
files to ROM–format files.
Example: MLINK BJ64_J
BJ64_J: Link control file name
(5) Use the MEM file conversion tool (MMCARD) to convert
ROM–format files to memory–card–format files.
This step is not required for the Series 16/18–MA.
Example: MMCARD BJ64_J
BJ64_J: ROM–format file name
For the syntax of menu definition programs, refer to the ”Super CAP M
Programming Manual” (B-62153E).

NOTE
A FANUC standard macro program is provided only after a
confidentiality agreement with a machine tool builder has
been signed.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
80 inform us,we will delete
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION
GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

E.2
MACRO CONVERTER
(MCONV)

E.2.1 A source file (extension: .DAT) containing a menu definition program,


conversational data definition program, and data item display program is
Outline
converted to the table data file (extension: .TBL). The conversion result
is output to the table conversion list (extension: .LST).

Menu definition program


Conversational data MCONV Table data
definition program (***.TBL)
Data item display program
(***.DAT)

Table conversion list


(***.LST)

E.2.2 The command format is as follows:


Operation A:\>MCONV file-spec parameters
(1) file-spec
Specifies the name of a source file to be converted. Specify a file
name in one of the two ways below:
D Directly specify a file name or file names
(Examples)
A:\>MCONV ABC DEF GHI
This command converts ABC.DAT, DEF.DAT, and GHI.DAT.

D Specify a link control file


(Examples)
A:\>MCONV @XYZ
This command converts the files specified with TBL= in
XYZ.LNK. For details, see Chapter 3.
(2) parameters
The following parameters can be specified.

–NR : Disables table data and files to be output.


–L1 : Disables the table conversion list to be output.

E.2.3 Create a source file consisting of menu definition programs in the format
of a text file. Be sure to assign extension .DAT to the source file.
Source File
The menu definition program, conversational data definition program,
and data item display program can be combined into the file as desired in
program units. All programs can be created in a single file. If a single
file contains a single program, up to 488 files can be created.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
81 inform us,we will delete
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION
GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
Super CAP M/Super CAP II M APPENDIX B–66102E/10

E.2.4 This file, which is output by the converter, is to be edited by the macro
Table Data File linker. The name of the table data file is the same as that of the source file
but with extension .TBL.

E.2.5 Conversion results, such as the list of source programs, error locations,
Table Conversion List error numbers, and converted file/program numbers, are output to this
file. The name of the table conversion list file is the same as that of the
File source file but with extension .LST.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
82 inform us,we will delete
E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION
GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

E.3
CONVERSION OF
TABLE DATA WITH
THE MACRO LINKER
(MLINK)
E.3.1 The table data file output by the macro converter can be converted
together with the object file output by the macro compiler to ROM-format
Outline
files with the macro linker.

E.3.2 The following shows an example of specifying a table data file. In the
example, the table data file consists of MENU.TBL for menu definition,
Link Control File
DATA.TBL for conversational data, and KOMK.TBL for data item
display.

/: MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE


/: SYSTEM FILE
CNC=A:\BJ64.PG1
CNC2=A:\BJ64.PG2
CNC3=A:\BJ64.PG3
/: LINK PARAMETER
P9000=11000000
P9001=00000001
P9002=11000000
P9003=10000000
P9007=10000000
P9033=12
P9037=5
9038=8000
/: MACRO PROGRAM
FILE=ABC,DEF
/: TABLE DATA
TBL=MENU,DATA,KOMK
/:

E.3.3 The link list file to be output by the linker contains a table data file name,
Link List File program numbers, and program size as well as macro program functions.
The file name is the same as that of the link control file but the extension
is replaced with MAP.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
83 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i APPENDIX B–66102E/10

CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II

F M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
84 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX WITH Series 16i/18i

F.1 The conventional Super CAP system (referred to below as CAP),


compiles and links all the required user programs (referred to below as
OVERVIEW programs) into a single MEM file (referred to below as a module), then
loads that file into the CNC.
Modular Super CAP (modular CAP) allows programs to be loaded into
the CNC as a set of modules. The modules include a CAP control module,
provided as a library, and other program modules.
After the CAP control module has been loaded into the CNC, a
user–developed module (user module) can be independently modified or
loaded.

NOTE
The modular function can be used with the modular CAP
only.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
85 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i APPENDIX B–66102E/10

F.2 The requirements for developing a user module and operating it on the
CNC are listed below:
DEVELOPMENT
ENVIRONMENT (1) Personal computer
D Main memory: At least 640K bytes
D OS: MS–DOS Version 3.1 or above
D Hard disk: Minimum of about 20M bytes
D 3.5” floppy disk drive
(2) Peripherals
D Memory card adapter
D 4M–byte flash memory card (Intel iMC004–FLSA)
(3) FANUC macro compiler (for personal computers)
D A08B–9001–J760#EN07 (for FANUC Series 16i)
D A08B–9001–J765#EN07 (for FANUC Series 18i)
(4) FANUC Super CAP macro library
D CAP module
D Macro libraries 1 and 2 for developing user modules
(5) NC
D NC system supporting modular CAP
D Macro capacity of at least 3M bytes
D F–ROM module with sufficient capacity to transfer the CAP
control module and user modules

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
86 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX WITH Series 16i/18i

F.3 The CAP control module is a MEM file that is provided in place of the
conventional library file. The CAP control module is loaded into the
CAP CONTROL CNC.
MODULE The CAP control module contains the following programs:
D CAP system control program
D FANUC standard macro program (Super CAP II T only)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
87 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i APPENDIX B–66102E/10

F.4 The following user modules can be created:


USER MODULES D Up to two user modules (user modules 1 and 2).
D The maximum total size of user modules 1 and 2 is 768K bytes
for Super CAP II T and 1.625M bytes for Super CAP II M.
The subsequent sections describe the procedure for creating a user
module, restrictions, and notes.

F.4.1 The following macro libraries are provided for creating the user modules:
Macro Libraries for D For FANUC Series 16i Super CAP II T: F16ITP1.MEX,
F16ITP2.MEX
Developing User
D For FANUC Series 16i Super CAP II M: F16IMP1.MEX,
Modules F16IMP1C.MEX, F16IMP2.MEX

NOTE
1 F16?P1.MEX and F16?P1C.MEX are used to create user
module 1.
2 F16?P2.MEX is used to create user module 2.

F.4.2 Follow the conventional procedure for developing a user module.


Developing a User Specify a macro library for developing a user module instead of the
conventional macro library. Then, compile and link the modules, and
Module convert the modules into memory card format.
The compile parameters to be specified are the same as the conventional
parameters. When specifying the size of the memory card module,
however, specify the size of the user module in the compile parameter
indicated below:
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9000 LD6 M3MB M2MB M1MB M512 M256 M128

Do not specify those bits indicated by shading.


Always specify LD6 to 1.

Size M512 M256 M128


512KB 1 0 0
256KB 0 1 0
128KB 0 0 1

The size of user module 1 of Super CAP II M is always 1.375M bytes.


Do not specify the M512 bit for user module 2 of Super CAP II M.
Specify the series and edition of the user module by adding the following
two lines to the link file.
SERN = series
VERN = edition
The series and edition can be specified with a combination of up to four
characters each from numerals (0 to 9 and upper–case A to Z). The series
and edition specified in the link file are displayed on the conversational
system configuration screen (Super CAP only).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
88 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX WITH Series 16i/18i

NOTE
Specify the user module series/edition display.

When a single user program is divided into two modules, specify the same
compile parameters (except parameter 9000) in the link files for user
modules 1 and 2.

F.4.3 User modules 1 and 2 must be loaded into F–ROM separately from the
CAP control module.
Transferring the User
Module to F–ROM The CAP control module and user modules 1 and 2 have the following file
names on the F–ROM.
D CAP control module
PDff_CAP
Depends on the SYSTEM compile parameter.
T when SYSTEM is TPATH1 or TPATH2.
M when SYSTEM is MPATH1 or MPATH2.

Depends on the SYSTEM compile parameter.


1 when SYSTEM is TPATH1 or MPATH1
2 when SYSTEM is TPATH2 or MPATH2

D User module 1
P1ff
Size specified in compile parameter 9000. However,
_CAP is indicated for Super CAP II M.

D User module 2
P2ff

F.4.4 When a FANUC standard program and a user program have identical
Executing the User program numbers, the user program takes priority. A FANUC standard
program can, therefore, be changed by creating a new program in the user
Program module and assigning it the number of the FANUC standard program to
be changed (Super CAP II T only).
When user modules 1 and 2 have identical program numbers, that
specified in user module 2 takes priority.

F.4.5
Restrictions and Notes (1) User modules 1 and 2 should not have identical user program
on Developing the User numbers. If the modules have identical program numbers, the
program specified in user module 2 takes priority.
Module
(2) Identical compile parameters must be specified in user modules 1 and
2 (except for compile parameter 9000).
(3) The total size of user modules 1 and 2 must not exceed the following:
D Super CAP II T: 768K bytes
D Super CAP II M: 1.625M bytes
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
89 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i APPENDIX B–66102E/10

F.5
RESTRICTIONS (1) The P–CODE loading function cannot be used with modular CAP.
IMPOSED ON THE (2) No program can be executed with the user modules only. The CAP
control module is necessary.
SYSTEM

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
90 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX WITH Series 16i/18i

F.6
CREATING SAMPLE D Example
Create a 256K–byte user module 1 and link it with the user programs
USER MODULES of CAPS and auxiliary processes. Create a 512K–byte user module
FOR SUPER CAP II T 2 and link it with a user–developed machining macro program.

F.6.1
Creating Programs (1) Edit the string file (CAPS.SRC) to change the title of the Super CAP
T basic menu screen and the series and edition of the standard macro
displayed on the system configuration screen.
D Before editing Character string of the series and edition of
the user program displayed on the conversa-
Several lines omitted tional system configuration screen
/* 123456789012 ;
N9998 (’BB0H_ZZ’) ;
/* 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
N9999 (’FANUC SUPER CAPIIT!’)
Several lines
Character string displayed as the title of the Super
omitted CAP T basic menu screen

D After editing
Several lines omitted
N9998 (’ABCDEFG’) ;
/* 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
N9999 (’DEBUG SYSTEM FOR SUPER CAP T!’)
Several lines omitted
(2) Create user programs for auxiliary processes.
D O1004.SRC
D O1005.SRC
D O1006.SRC
(3) Create a machining macro program.
D USR_PRG.SRC

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
91 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i APPENDIX B–66102E/10

F.6.2 Create the link files to be used to create user modules 1 and 2.
Creating Link Files D Link file for user module 1 (F16ITP1.LNK)
/*
/* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file.
/* –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
/*
/* executer file ’FS16TI for VGA’
/*
CNC =F16ITP1.MEX Macro library for user module 1
SERN =USR1 Add these lines to the link file to display the
VERN =0001 series and edition of user module 1.
SYSTEM=TPATH1
/*
/* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059
/*
P9000=10000100 Specify a size of 256K bytes.
P9001=10000001
P9002=11000000
P9003=10001001
P9007=01000000
P9009=00000100 Common part shared by user programs 1
P9013=200 and 2
P9021=208
P9022=209
P9023=320
P9024=321
P9030=27
P9031=28
P9033=97
P9037=7
P9044=2044
P9038=4999
/*
/* Link file’s
/*
FILE=CAPS String file: The string file is also included in the
Super CAP control module. A program speci-
FILE=O1004
fied in a user module takes priority.
FILE=O1005
FIEL=O1006

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
92 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX WITH Series 16i/18i

D Link file for user module 2 (F16TCP2.LNK)


/*
/* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file.
/* –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
/*
/* executer file ’FS16TI for VGA’
/*
CNC =F16ITP2.MEX Macro library for user module 2
SERN =USR2 Add these lines to the link file to display the se-
VERN =0001 ries and edition of user module 2.
SYSTEM=TPATH1
/*
/* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059
/*
P9000=10001000 Specify a size of 512K bytes.
P9001=10000001
P9002=11000000
P9003=10001001
P9007=01000000
P9009=00000100 Common part shared by user programs 1
P9013=200 and 2
P9021=208
P9022=209
P9023=320
P9024=321
P9030=27
P9031=28
P9033=97
P9037=7
P9044=2044
P9038=4999
/*
/* Link file’s
/*
FILE=USR_PRG

After creating two files as described above, execute MLINK/MMCARD


to create MEM files. The following MEM files are created:
D F16ITP1.MEM: 256K bytes
D F16ITP2.MEM: 512K bytes

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
93 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i APPENDIX B–66102E/10

F.7
CREATING SAMPLE D Example
Create a 1.375M–byte user module 1 and link it with a conversational
USER MODULES macro program and C program. Create a 256K–byte user module 2
FOR SUPER CAP II M and link it with a user–developed auxiliary macro program.

F.7.1
Creating Programs (1) While referring to a FANUC standard macro program, create the
following conversational macro programs and conversational macro
definition tables:
D TL_AUTO.SRC
D FS_AUTO.SRC
D ZH_DATA.SRC
D ZH_MENU.SRC
D JPN_MENU.TBL
D ZH_PARA.TBL
(2) Create a required C program.
D CPROG.C
(3) Create an auxiliary macro program.
D AUX_PRG.SRC

NOTE
A FANUC standard macro program is provided only after a
confidentiality agreement with a machine tool builder has
been signed.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
94 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX WITH Series 16i/18i

F.7.2 Create the link files to be used to create user modules 1 and 2.
Creating Link Files D Link file for user module 1 (F16IMP1.LNK)
/*
/* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file.
/* –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
/* Macro library for user module 1.
/* executer file ’FS16MI for VGA’ If user module 1 is not linked
with a C program, use
/*
F16IMP1.MEX.
CNC =F16IMP1C.MEX
SERN =USR1
VERN =0001 Add these lines to the link file to display the series and
SYSTEM=MPATH1 edition of user module 1.
/*
/* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059
/v
P9000=10000000 The size is always 1.375M bytes and need not
P9001=00000001 be specified.
P9002=11000000
P9003=10000000
P9007=10000000
P9009=00000010
P9033=12
/*
/* Link file’s
/*
FILE=TL_AUTO
FILE=FS_AUTO
FILE=ZH_DATA Conversational macro program
FILE=ZH_MENU
/*
/* Table Data
/*
TBL=JPN_MENU
Conversational macro definition table
TBL=ZH_PARA
/*
/* C Program
/*
HFILE=CPROG C program (when linked)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
95 inform us,we will delete
F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING
SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T
WITH Series 16i/18i APPENDIX B–66102E/10

D Link file for user module 2 (F16MCP2.LNK)


/*
/* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file.
/* ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
/*
/* executer file ’FS16MI for VGA’
/*
CNC =F16IMP2.MEX Macro library for user module 2
SERN =USR2 Add these lines to the link file to display the
VERN =0001 series and edition of user module 2.
SYSTEM=MPATH1
/*
/* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059
/*
P9000=10000100 Specify a size of 256K bytes.
P9001=00000001
P9002=11000000
P9003=10000000 Common part shared by user programs
P9007=10000000 1 and 2
P9009=00000010
P9033=12
/*
/* Link file’s
/*
FILE=AUX_PRG
After creating two files as described above, execute MLINK/MMCARD
to create MEM files. The following MEM files are created:
D F16IMP1.MEM: 1.375M bytes
D F16IMP2.MEM: 256K bytes

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
96 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, 20, 21-B,

G 0i-A)

G.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
G.2 OPERATION AND
CORRESPONDING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
G.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND
REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
G.4 SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (Series 20) . . . . . 118
G.5 FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (Series 20) . . . 120

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
97 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.1 The boot system of first loads the CNC system software (flash RAM !
DRAM), then starts execution of the CNC software so that other software
OUTLINE can be executed. (Some models run the CNC system software entirely in
flash memory or EPROM, without using DRAM.)
The CNC boot system supports the following system maintenance
functions:
(1) Registering a file in flash memory
Reads a file to flash memory from an MS-DOS format memory card
conforming to JEIDA V4.1.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash memory
(3) Deleting a file from flash memory
(4) Batch saving of parameters, programs, and other files, powered by
battery (SRAM area), to a memory card and batch restoring of data
from the memory card
(5) Writing a file in flash memory to a memory card
(6) Formatting a memory card
(7) Deleting a file from a memory card
This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the
operation and corresponding screen displays for the functions listed
above.

G.1.1 BOOT SYSTEM is automatically started when the CNC is powered on.
It then loads and starts the CNC system software. The user, therefore, can
Starting the BOOT
usually ignore the operation of BOOT SYSTEM. When maintenance is
SYSTEM carried out or if flash memory does not contain a required file, however,
the boot system must be controlled from an on-screen menu.

(1) During system maintenance, for example, when a file in flash


memory is to be replaced
Operation: Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two
soft keys at the right end.

Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.

(2) If flash memory does not contain a file required to start the CNC
If the file required to start the CNC (NC BASIC) is not found in flash
memory, or if that file is damaged, the BOOT SYSTEM menu is
automatically displayed when the CNC is powered on.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
98 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

G.1.2 The boot system manages files in flash memory by dividing them into two
System File and User main groups: system files and user files. These two groups have the
following characteristics:
File
D System files CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC
D User files PMC sequence program (ladder), P-CODE macro program, and other
user-created files

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
99 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.2 When the boot system is started, the MAIN MENU screen appears. The
contents of this screen are described below:
OPERATION AND
CORRESPONDING
SCREENS  SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1 - 05

 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING


 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP

6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT

10. END
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
 SELECT MODE AND HIT [SELECT] KEY

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

: Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system are indicated
at the right end.
: Function used to write data to flash memory
: Function used to check the edition of a file in ROM
: Function used to delete a file from flash memory
: Function used to make a backup of the data stored on a memory card
: Function used to make a backup of the data in SRAM

: Function used to delete a file from a memory card
: Function used to format a memory card
: Function used to terminate the boot system and start the CNC
: Brief guidance message or error message

D Operating procedure Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After
positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft
key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation
from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
D Basic operation

Position the Select a Check the


cursor. function selection Execute
[UP] → [SELECT] → [YES] → the → Select END
[DOWN] [NO] function

→ Return to
original state

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
100 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

G.2.1
System Data Loading
Screen

Description This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card and
write it to flash memory.

Screen configuration

 SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1


FILE DIRECTORY
 B0A1E01.ROM
B0A1E02.ROM
 END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


 SELECT MODE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

: Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m) are
displayed in n/m format at the right end.
: Files on the memory card
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

Operation
(1) Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card into
flash memory. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.
Up to eight file names can be listed on a single page. If nine or more
files are stored on the memory card, the ninth and subsequent files are
displayed on other pages. To display the next page, press the [ ] soft
key. To display the previous page, press the [ ] soft key. END is
displayed on the last page.
(2) When a file is selected, the system prompts the operator to confirm
loading of that file.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) To load the file, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO]
key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
101 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

(4) When the function terminates normally, the system displays the
following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs,
see Appendix (B).
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Others
(a) Counter display while a file is being loaded
While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being
accessed is displayed.

ÃÃ
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗

ÃÃ
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
ADDRESS 001:000022FF z The counter is displayed under
  the message field.

: Number of the 128-KB management unit where the data being


accessed is positioned in flash memory
: Relative address within the management unit (Only series 20 is
indicated.)

(b) File name in flash memory


The boot system uses the first four characters of the file name to
identify a file in flash memory. If the file to be read from a memory
card and a file already written into flash memory have names
beginning with the same four characters, delete the latter from flash
memory. Then, start reading the new file into flash memory. The
following table lists the names and contents of files.
File names may be changed without notice.
D Series 16/18
File name Contents File type
NC BASIC Basic System file
DG SERVO Servo System file
GRAPHIC Graphic System file
NC OPTN Optional System file
PMC ∗∗∗∗ PMC control software, etc. System file
PCD ∗∗∗∗ P-CODE macro file/OMM User file
CEX ∗∗∗∗ C-language executor User file
PMC-∗∗∗∗ Ladder software User file
PMC@∗∗∗∗ Loader ladder software User file

A square (j) and an asterisk (*) represent a numeric character and an


alphabetic character respectively.
D Series 20
File name Contents File type
NC BASIC Basic System file
DG SERVO Servo System file
OPT LANG Optional System file
PCD ∗∗∗∗ P-CODE macro file/OMM User file
PMC-∗∗∗∗ Ladder software User file

An asterisk (*) represent a numeric character or an alphabetic character


respectively.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
102 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

D Series 21
File name Contents File type
NC BASIC Basic (:1) System file
DG SERVO Servo (:1) System file
GRAPHIC Graphic (:1) System file
NC OPTN Optional (:1) System file
PMC ∗∗∗∗ PMC control software, etc. (:1) System file
PCD ∗∗∗∗ P-CODE macro file/OMM User file
PMC-∗∗∗∗ Ladder software User file
PMC@∗∗∗∗ Loader ladder software (:2) User file

A square (j) or an asterisk (*) represent a numeric character or an


alphabetic character respectively.
(:1) : Only for 21–MB and 21–TB (controller B)
(:2) : Only for 21–TB (controller B)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
103 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.2.2
System Data Check
Screen

Description This screen is used to list files in flash memory, together with the number
of 128-KB management units constituting each file and the series and
edition of the software.

Screen configuration

 SYSTEM DATA CHECK


FILE DIRECTORY
 1 NC BASIC(10)
2 DG SERVO( 1)
3 PMC-RA ( 1)
4 PCD 0.5M( 4)
5 OPT LANG( 4)
 END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


 SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

: Screen title.
: Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name. The file names are given in item G.2.1–(1).
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
104 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

Operation
(1) Select the file for which details are required. For example, select ”1
NC BASIC.”
(2) The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed,
together with the series and edition of the software. After checking
the list, press the [SELECT] soft key and return to the file selection
screen.

ROM FILE CHECK


NC BASIC
0 B0A1 801A 000
0 B0A1 801A 000
1 B0A1 802A 001
2 B0A1 841A 002
3 B0A1 842A 003
4 B0A1 881A 004 Internal management unit number
5 B0A1 882A 005
6 B0A1 8C1A 006 ROM number and edition
7 B0A1 8C2A 007 Series

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


HIT SELECT KEY.

Others
D Parity information for system file and user file
The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, OPT LANG, and other system files in
flash memory contain parity information in each of their management
units. If the file name field or parity field on the check screen contains
a non-ASCII character or @, the flash ROM may be
damaged/destroyed or a damaged file may have been read. Re-read
data from the memory card.
The PMC-xxxx, PC-D xxxx, and other user files do not contain parity
information in each of their management units. A non-ASCII
character or @ may be included in the displayed series/edition
information. This does not, however, indicate any abnormality.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
105 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.2.3
System Data Delete
Screen
Description This screen is used to delete a user file from flash memory.

Screen configuration

 SYSTEM DATA DELETE


FILE DIRECTORY
 1 NC BASIC(10)
2 DG SERVO( 1)
3 PMC-RB ( 1)
4 PCD 0.5M( 4)
5 OPT LANG( 4)
 END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


 SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

: Screen title.
: Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

Operation
(1) Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message:
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) To delete the file, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press the [NO] key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
DELETE ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.

(4) When the deletion terminates normally, the system displays the
following message. Press the [SELECT] key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
106 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

Others
D System file and user file on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen
The SYSTEM DATA DELETE function provides a safeguard against
accidental deletion of the system files. User files, however, are not
protected. Protected system files can be overwritten by using the
SYSTEM DATA LOADING function.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
107 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.2.4
System Data Save
Screen

Description This screen is used to write a user file from flash memory to a memory
card. This function supports the writing of user files only. System files
cannot be written from flash memory to a memory card.

Screen configuration

 SYSTEM DATA SAVE


FILE DIRECTORY
 1 NC BASIC(10)
2 DG SERVO( 1)
3 PMC-RB ( 1)
4 PCD 0.5M( 4)
5 NC1 OPTN( 4)
 END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


 SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

: Screen title.
: Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

Operation
(1) Position the cursor to the name of the file to be saved, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message:
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) To save the file, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press the [NO] key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RA.000

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
108 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

(4) When saving terminates normally, the system displays the following
message. Press the [SELECT] key. The name of the file written to
the memory card is displayed. Check the file name.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RB.000

Others
(1) Difference between a system file and user file for SYSTEM DATA
SAVE
SYSTEM DATA SAVE protects system files so that they cannot be
copied easily. User files are not protected.
(2) Names of saved files
The names of the files written from flash memory to the memory card
are as follows:
D Series 16/18
Flash memory Memory card
NC BASIC ! NC_BASIC.XXX
DG SERVO ! DG_SERVO.XXX
NC1 OPTN ! NC1_OPTN.XXX
PMC-RB ! PMC–RB.XXX
PCD 0.5M ! PCD_0.5M.XXX
PCD 1.0M ! PCM_1.0M.XXX
PCD 1.5M ! PCD_1.5M.XXX
D Series 20
Flash memory Memory card
NC BASIC ! NC_BASIC.XXX
DG SERVO ! DG_SERVO.XXX
OPT LANG ! OPT_LANG.XXX
PMC-RA ! PMC–RA.XXX
PCD 0.5M ! PCD_0.5M.XXX
PCD 1.0M ! PCM_1.0M.XXX
PCD 1.5M ! PCD_1.5M.XXX
D Series 21
Flash memory Memory card
NC BASIC ! NC_BASIC.XXX
DG SERVO ! DG_SERVO.XXX
NC1 OPTN ! NC1_OPTN.XXX
PMC-RA ! PMC–RA.XXX
PCD 128k ! PCD_128k.XXX
PCD 256k ! PCD_256k.XXX
PCD 0.5M ! PCD_0.5M.XXX
PCD 1.0M ! PCM_1.0M.XXX
XXX is equivalent to the extension assigned to MS-DOS file names.
One of 32 numbers from 000 to 031 is assigned as XXX. For
example, if a PMC-RB file in flash memory is saved to a memory card
containing no PMC_RB.* files, the saved file is named
PMC_RB.000. If that same file is saved to a memory card that
already contains a PMC_RB.000 file, however, it is named
PMC_RB.001. In this way, the extension is incremented by one, up
to PMC_RB.031. If there are any free extension numbers in the
sequence of the extension numbers, they are used in ascending order.
If two or more files having identical names but different extension
numbers are saved to a single memory card, check the file names
displayed after saving. In the case of Serics 20, to write a P-CODE
macro file, with a password assigned by MLINK, from flash memory
to a memory card, the password must be entered. The macro
password is explained in Sec.G.4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
109 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.2.5
SRAM Data Backup
Screen

Description This screen is used for the batch saving and restoring of parameters,
programs, and other data to be retained after the CNC is turned off to/from
a memory card.

Screen configuration Select ”4 SRAM DATA BACKUP” from the SYSTEM MONITOR
MAIN MENU screen. The following screen is displayed.

 SYSTEM DATA BACKUP

 1. SRAM BACKUP ( CNC -> MEMORY CARD )


2. RESTORE SRAM ( MEMORY CARD -> CNC )
 END

 SRAM SIZE : 512K( BASIC )


 FILE NAME : SRAM_5A.FDB

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


 SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

: Screen title.
: Menu
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC
: File name
: Message

Operation [Backing up data]


(1) Select ”1. SRAM BACKUP.” The following confirmation message
is displayed. To back up the data, press the [YES] key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(2) The FILE NAME: field displays the name of the file that is being
written to the memory card. The writing time depends on the amount
of free space on the memory card. Generally, to write the SRAM
BASIC file (512KB) takes about 2 minutes.

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
SRAM SIZE : 0.5M( BASIC )
FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A.000!MEMORY CARD z Name of file that

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
is being backed
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ up.
SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
110 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

(3) Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[Restoring data]
(1) Select ”2. RESTORE SRAM.” The system displays the following
message. Press the [YES] key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(2) The system displays the following message while the file is being
restored.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.

(3) Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Others
(1) Name of a backup file
The name of a backup file written to a memory card by the SRAM
backup function depends on the size of the SRAM in the CNC.
D Series 16/18
The backup file is divided every 512KB.

File Size of SRAM


number 0.5MB 1.0MB 1.5MB 2.5MB
1 SRAM0_5A.FDB SRAM1_0A.FDB SRAM1_5A.FDB SRAM2_5A.FDB
2 SRAM1_0B.FDB SRAM1_5B.FDB SRAM2_5B.FDB
3 SRAM1_5C.FDB SRAM2_5C.FDB
4 SRAM2_5D.FDB
5 SRAM2_5E.FDB

D Series 20, 21
Size of SRAM File name on the memory card CNC
128KB SRAM128K.XXX
Series 20
256KB SRAM256K.XXX
256KB SRAM256K.XXX
Series 21
512KB SRAM512K.XXX

XXX is equivalent to the extension assigned to MS-DOS file names.


One of 32 numbers from 000 to 031 is assigned as XXX. The number
is assigned as described in the section describing the use of the
SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen. If two or more files are normally
saved, check the file names displayed after saving.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
111 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.2.6
Memory Card File
Delete Screen

Description This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.

Screen configuration

 SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1


FILE DIRECTORY
 B0A1E01.ROM
B0A1E02.ROM

END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


 SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

: Screen title. The current page number (n) and the total number of
pages (m) are displayed in n/m format at the right-hand end.
: Files on the memory card
: Option for returning to the previous menu
: Message

Operation
(1) Select the name of the file to be deleted from the memory card by
pressing the [SELECT] key.
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the
[YES] key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) Upon normal deletion of the file, the system displays the following
message. Press the [SELECT] key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Others
D When nine or more files are stored to the memory card
Display the desired page, by following the procedure in the section
describing the use of the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
112 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

G.2.7
Memory Card Format
Function

Description This function is used to format a memory card. A memory card must be
formatted before it can be used for the first time or before it is to be re-used
after its data has been lost as a result of its battery failing or similar
reasons.

Operation
(1) On the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select ”7.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT.”
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the
[YES] key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) The system displays the following message while formatting a


memory card:
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.

(4) Upon the completion of formatting, the system displays the following
message. Press the [SELECT] key.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
113 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.2.8
End of Boot System

Description This function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.

Operation On the MAIN MENU screen, select ”9. END.” The system displays the
”ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO” message. To terminate the boot
system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. If the [NO] key
is pressed, the boot system is not terminated.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1) After the [YES] soft key is pressed


D The system checks the NC BASIC system file in flash memory. At
this time, the system displays the following message:

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

D If the NC BASIC system file is normal, the system reads the system
file into DRAM (for Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, or 20) then starts the NC
basic system. During reading, the following message blinks:

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


LOADING BASIC TO DRAM

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

D Upon the completion of loading, the following message appears,


after which NC BASIC starts.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


CNC DATA LOADED

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

D If the contents of the NC BASIC system file have been damaged or


destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection screen, in
the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed.
(2) If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing
selection screen, shown below:

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT MENU AND HIT [SELECT] KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
114 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

G.3 The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical
order.
ERROR MESSAGES
AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS

Message Description and required action

D DELETE ERROR. Cause An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Retry the deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash
ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Replace the
flash ROM module.

DEVICE ERROR (CNC x) Cause An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful.
Action Retry the write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the
flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce
the flash ROM module.

D–RAM OR S–RAM PARITY Cause Invalid data was found in the RAM area.
Action If an attempt is made to back RAM that has never been
cleared, this message appears. When this happens, the boot
system may stop.

F FILE SAVE ERROR. Cause An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check that the memory card is not damaged. (NOTE)

FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE Cause There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file.
Delete any unnecessary files from flash ROM.
Action For the Series 20, if this message is displayed and a file can-
not be read although the result of calculation indicates that
the flash memory has enough space, see Section G.5, ”Free
Area of the Flash Memory.”

FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. Cause The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system.
HIT SELECT. Action Put the flash ROM module on the board.

FORMAT ERROR. Cause The formatting of the memory card failed.


HIT SELECT KEY. Action Only a memory card of the SRAM type can be used.
Check whether the memory card used is of the flash memory
type.

I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE Cause The selected file cannot be read into flash memory.
Action The selected file or the header information for flash ROM may
have been damaged or destroyed.

INCORRECT PASSWORD Cause Error in the password specification


Action Key in the correct password.

L LOADING ERROR. Cause An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Do not touch the memory card while loading data.

NOTE
Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that
its circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely
inserted into its slot.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
115 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Message Description and required action

M MAX EXTENSION OVER. Cause The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Delete any unnecessary backup files from the memory card.

MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. Cause The memory card’s battery is exhausted.
HIT SELECT. Action Replace the battery.

MEMORY CARD FULL. Cause The memory card is full.


HIT SELECT KEY. Action Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. Alterna-
tively, replace the memory card with another card having suffi-
cient free space.

MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. Cause The memory card could not be accessed.
HIT SELECT KEY Action Check that the memory card is normal.

MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. Cause The memory card is not inserted into its slot.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check that the memory card is pushed fully home.

MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Cause Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write
SELECT KEY. inhibit switch is set.
Action Disable the write inhibit switch.

MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. Cause Access to a memory card failed.


HIT SELECT KEY. Action The memory card’s battery may have gone dead, the memory
card may have been damaged electrically, or the memory
card may not be inserted in the slot securely.

MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. Cause Access to the memory card has failed.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check whether the memory card is defective.

N NMI OCCURRED. Cause A hardware or software error occurred.


PLEASE POWER OFF. Action Determine the procedure which causes the error, and report
it to FANUC together with the series and edition of the boot
software.

R ROM PARITY ERROR: Cause The NC BASIC is parity error.


NC BASIC. HIT SELECT. Action Check whether NC BASIC is in flash ROM, using SYSTEM
DATA CHECK.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
116 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

Message Description and required action

S SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. Cause An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check that the memory card is normal.

SRAMXXXX * NOT FOUND. Cause A backup file of the SRAM with a capacity of XXX cannot be
HIT SELECT KEY. found.
Action A backup file is required for restoration.

SRAM PARITY OCCURRED. Cause A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM
PLEASE POWER OFF. (Caution).
Action The SRAM areas of all CNCs are cleared before shipment
from the factory so that they are free from parity errors. If,
however, the CNC receives impact during transportation, or
it is left unused for one year or longer, causing the backup bat-
tery to run down, a parity error may occur in the SRAM area.
If a parity error occurs in the SRAM area, the data stored there
is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the CNC may not use
the entire SRAM area. It is when the portion where a parity
error occurred is called that the error is detected by the hard-
ware. If, therefore, a parity error occurs in a portion not ac-
cessed by the CNC, the CNC may operate without any prob-
lems. The SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT, however,
reads the entire SRAM area, and a parity error may be de-
tected during backup although the CNC operates without any
problems. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of
the CNC is not guaranteed and the data cannot be backed up
using the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT. Because, how-
ever, the CNC may operate without any problem, it is recom-
mended that the necessary data be backed up using a floppy
cassette or handy file, all data clear be performed, and then
the data backup be loaded into the CNC. Once all clear is per-
formed, the parity error is eliminated, making it possible to use
the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
117 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.4
SETTING A MACRO
PASSWORD
(Series 20)

G.4.1
Overview The Series 20 can easily read a file from flash memory and write it to a
memory card. Security for the P-CODE file of a user-created macro
executor is important. Assigning a password to the P-CODE file at a link
(MLINK) affords security against the unauthorized reading of that file.
MLINK of personal computer compiler V02.3 or later, which supports a
function for specifying a password is used to achieve this.

G.4.2
Password Specify a single five-digit password, each of the digits being from 1 to 5.
A number greater than or equal to 6 or 0 cannot be specified for the
password. Only five digits can be specified. If passwords are not used,
avoid coding PASS= in the MLINK link control file, described later.
Characters that can be specified: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Number of digits: 5
If a password that does not satisfy these requirements is specified, the
system displays the following error message:

ERROR: Illegal parameter is specified:PASS=XXXXX

The system stops MLINK processing.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
118 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

G.4.3
Setting a Password Specify a password in the MLINK link control file (extension .LNK). The
five digits immediately subsequent to PASS= constitute the password.
In the example below, the password is 15243.

(Example)
/:
/: MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE
(SAMPLE)
/:
/:
CNC=A:\MCOMP\MEX\F20M.MEX
/:
P9001=0000001
P9010=100
P9037=5
P9038=8000
/: JIKKOU-MACRO
FILE=ABC,DEF
FILE=XYZ,UVW
/:
FILE=SSS
/: P-CODE FILE PASSWORD
PASS=15243

G.4.4
Specifying a Password The Series 20 boot system can read a macro executor P-CODE file having
for the Series 20 Boot the password from flash memory only when the password is entered.
System
INPUT PASSWORD. ?????

The system displays the message and assigns numbers 1 to 5 to the soft
keys. When a valid password is entered, the P-CODE file can be written
to a memory card.

1 2 3 4 5 zSoft key indications

< > zSoft keys

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
119 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

G.5 When the NO SPACE message is displayed, flash memory is in one of the
following two states:
FREE AREA IN
FLASH MEMORY (1) Flash memory is fully occupied.
(Series 20) (2) Flash memory contains files in non-contiguous areas.
In flash memory, only continuous free areas are recognized as free areas.
Non-contiguous free areas may be ignored as described in (2) above.

G.5.1 Using the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen, check the capacity of the
Determining the Cause flash memory module installed in the Series 20.
of the No–space State Module size Number of management units
2MB 16
3MB 24
4MB 32

Total the number of management units constituting the files in flash


memory and subtract the total from the number of management units
corresponding to the capacity of the installed flash memory module.

Number of free management units=


Number of management units corresponding – Total number of management
to module capacity unitsconstituting all files

The number of management units constituting each file is given in


following table.
Number of
File name Contents
management units
NC BASIC Basic 10
OPT LANG Option 4
DG SERVO Servo 1
PMC-RA Lodder 1
PCD 0.5M P-CODE macro file (0.5M byte) 4
PCD 1.0M P-CODE macro file (1.0M byte) 8
PCD 1.5M P-CODE macro file (1.5M byte) 12

If a NO SPACE error message is displayed even though calculation


indicates that flash memory contains sufficient free management units,
then the free area in flash memory is non-contiguous. For example, if the
files are read to a 3MB flash memory module (24 management units) in
the order in which they are listed below, the module will have four free
management units.

24 – 20 = 4
Number of management Total number of Number of free
units in the module management units used management units

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
120 inform us,we will delete
G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

1 NC BASIC(10)
2 DG SERVO( 1)
3 PMC-RA ( 1)
4 PCD 0.5M( 4)
5 OPT LANG( 4)

The files are written into the 3MB flash memory module as shown below:
Before deletion (continuous free area) After deletion (non-continuous free areas)

Management unit Management unit


File File
number number

000 NC BASIC 1 000 NC BASIC 1


: : : : : :
009 NC BASIC 10 009 NC BASIC 10
010 DG SERVO 1 010 DG SERVO 1
011 PMC-RA 1 011 PMC-RA 1
012 PCD 0.5M 1 012 Free
013 PCD 0.5M 2 013 Free
014 PCD 0.5M 3 014 Free
015 PCD 0.5M 4 015 Free
Non-
016 OPT LANG 1 016 OPT LANG 1 contiguous
free areas
017 OPT LANG 2 017 OPT LANG 2
018 OPT LANG 3 018 OPT LANG 3
019 OPT LANG 4 019 OPT LANG 4
020 Free 020 Free
021 Free 020 Free
022 Free 020 Free
023 Free 020 Free

If P-CODE macro file PCD 0.5M is deleted, eight management units (1MB)
become free in flash memory. As the free management units are separated
in flash memory, the 1-MB P-CODE macro file PCD 1.0M cannot be read
into flash memory. (Use the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen to determine
whether the management unit numbers of the files are contiguous.)
If non-contiguous free areas are found, use the SYSTEM DATA SAVE
function to save the OPT LANG file, sandwiched between two free areas,
to a memory card. Then, delete the OPT LANG file from flash memory.
Re-read the file from the memory card into flash memory. The file will
now be placed next to the PMC-RA file, with a continuous free area of
1MB reserved.

NOTE
The OPT LANG system file is deleted in this example only
for ease of explanation. Actually, the user cannot delete a
system file.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
121 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

H BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123


H.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
H.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
122 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.1 The boot system load the CNC system software (flash RAM→DRAM),
then starts it so that software can be executed.
OVERVIEW The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the
CNC:
(1) Registering a file in flash ROM
⋅ Reads a file from a memory card, in FAT format, into flash ROM.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM
(3) Deleting a file from flash ROM
(4) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs
backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card
(5) Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card
(6) Formatting of a memory card
(7) Deleting a file from a memory card
This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the
screen displays and operation for the functions listed above.

CAUTION
This control unit supports the use of a memory card as an
input/output device. When a flash card is used, however,
data can be written to a FANUC–recommended card only.
Data can be read in the same way as with an ordinary SRAM
card, provided the data has been saved in FAT format. Note
that, when a flash card is used, the card capacity is reduced
by 128KB.
See the order list for details of the supported memory card
types.

H.1.1 In ordinary system activation, the boot system automatically transfers


Starting the Boot files from flash ROM to DRAM in the background.
The user is not aware of this operation. However, the boot system must
System be operated manually, from menu screen, when maintenance is to be
carried out or when the flash ROM does not contain a required file.
1 In system maintenance, for example, to replace a file in ROM
Operation : Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two soft
keys at the right end.

Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.

If soft keys are not provided (for example, when a touch pad is being
used), use the MDI numeric keys. Hold down the 6 and 7
keys until the boot system screen appears.

± ± ± ± ± ± ±
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
123 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

2 When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start the
CNC
Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts
transferring files from flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason, a
file required to start the CNC (NC basic) is not in flash ROM or has
been destroyed, the boot system is automatically started.

H.1.2 The boot system organizes files in flash ROM into two main groups :
System Files and User system files and user files. These two file types have the following
characteristics :
Files
D System files CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC
D User files PMC sequence program (ladder), P–CODE macro program, and other
user–created files

H.1.3 When CAP–II board or LCB (loader control board) is mounted on the
Boot Slot CNC, we have to access to SRAM that mounted on additional board. So,
the boot system displays BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION screen that
Configuration Screen to select a access board.
D Screen configuration

(1) BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION 60M1–02

NO. BOARD F–ROM SRAM


(2) 0. MAIN 4MB 1.0MB
1. PMC–RE 6MB 256KB
2. CAP–II 512KB
3. LCB 512KB

(3) ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT SLOT AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1) : Screen title.


(2) : Flash memory size and SRAM size of each board.
(3) : Message
D Operation Press the [ UP ] or [DOWN] soft key to move the cursor, and select board
to press the [SELECT] soft key.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
124 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.2 When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is
displayed. This screen is described below :
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION
AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE
D MAIN MENU screen

(1) SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1-01

(2) 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING


(3) 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
(4) 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
(5) 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
(6) 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
(7) 6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
(8) 7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT

(9) 10.END

(10) ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1) : Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system appear at
the right end.
(2) : Function for writing data to flash ROM.
(3) : Function for checing the edition of a file in ROM.
(4) : Function for deleting a file from flash ROM.
(5) : Function for making a backup copy of the data stored on the memory
card.
(6) : Function for making a backup copy of the data in SRAM.
(7) : Function for deleting a file from a memory card.
(8) : Function for formatting a memory card.
(9) : Function for terminating the boot system and starting the CNC.
(10): Condensed guidance or error message
D Operating procedure Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After
positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft
key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation
from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
D Basic operation

Position the Select a Check the


cursor. function selection Execute
[UP] → [SELECT] → [YES] → the → Select END
[DOWN] [NO] function

→ Return to
original state

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
125 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

H.2.1
System Data Loading
Screen

D Description This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card into
flash ROM.

D Screen configuration

(1) SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1

FILE DIRECTORY
(2) B1F1A_B.MEM
B1F1A_AI.MEM
(3) END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


(4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1) : Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m)
are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.
(2) : Files on the memory card
(3) : Option for returning to previous menu Message
(4) : Message

D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card and
written to flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.
A single page can list up to eight file names. If the memory card
contains nine or more files, the remaining files are displayed on
another page.
To display the next page, press the soft key.
To display the previous page, press the soft key. The END option
is displayed on the last page.
The END option is displayed on the last page.
2 After a file has been slected, the system asks whether that file is to be
loaded.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
126 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

3 To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO]
key.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.

4 When loading terminates normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see D.3

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

D Others
1 Counter display while a file is being loaded
While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being
accessed is displayed.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
ADDRESS 001: ² The counter appears under the
(1) message fild.

(1) : Number of 128–KB management unit in flash ROM


2 File name in flash ROM
The boot system identifies a file in flash ROM by the first four
characters of the ID in the header. If flash ROM has a file of the same
type as a file to be read from the memory card, the file in flash ROM
is deleted before the file on the memory card is read. The following
table lists the IDs in the header and the contents. Note that these IDs
are subject to change without prior notice.

File name Contents File type

NC BASIC Basic System file


DG SERVO Servo System file
GRAPHIC Graphic System file
NCj OPTN Optional System file
PMCj∗∗∗∗ PMC control software, etc. System file
PDj∗jjj∗ 1st executor User file
P1j∗jjj∗ 2nd executor User file
P2j∗jjj∗ 3rd executor User file
CEX ∗∗∗∗ C–language executor User file
(Except Series 21i)
PMC - ∗∗∗∗ Ladder software User file
PMC@∗∗∗∗ Ladder software for the loader User file

V : A numeric character, * : An alphabetic character

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
127 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

3 File name of the executor system software


The Series 16i/18i/21i–A has separate executor system software for
path 1, path 2, and the loader. All the software is stored in the flash
ROM of the first path.
Under two–path control with the Series 16–C and the like, a common
executor system software file name (PCD1.0M, for example) is used
for different paths. The Series 16i/18i/21i, however, use separate file
names for different paths.
Accordingly, keyword SYSTEM has been added to the link control
file of the macro compiler. (See Section 4.2, ”Macro Linker.”)
The following format is used for the file name in the flash ROM.
(1) Format of the file name in the flash ROM
Format
PD“path-number” “attribute” “size”

Standard : Depends on
the compile
parameter
First executor S–CAP : A fixed
(Standard/Super value is
embedded.
CAP)
M : M series
T : T series
L : Loader
1 : First path
2 : Second path
P1“path-number” “attribute” “size”

Depends on the com-


pile parameter
Second executor
(Super CAP only) M : M series
T : T series

1 : First path
2 : Second path
P2“path-number” “attribute” “size”

Depends on the com-


pile parameter
Third executor
(Super CAP only) M : M series
T : T series

1 : First path
2 : Second path

(2) File name types in the flash ROM


F–ROM file name Description
PD1M“size” First path of M series (first executor)
PD2M“size” Second path of M series (first executor)
PD1T“size” First path of T series (first executor)
PD2T“size” Second path of T series (first executor)
PD1L“size” First path of loader
P11M“size” First path of M series (second executor)
P12M“size” Second path of M series (second executor)
P21M“size” First path of M series (third executor)
P22M“size” Second path of M series (third executor)
P11T“size” First path of T series (second executor)
P12T“size” Second path of T series (second executor)
P21T“size” First path of T series (third executor)
P22T“size” Second path of T series (third executor)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
128 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.2.2
System Data Check
Screen
D Description This screen is used to list files in flash ROM, together with the
corresponding numbers of 128–KB management units in each file and the
series and edition of the software.
D Screen configuration

(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1/1


(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)
(3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 DG SERVO ( 1)
3 PMC0BSC ( 2)
4 PMC–RB ( 1)
5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)
END
(4)

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


(5) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1) : Screen title


(2) : Names of accessing board
(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
(4) : Returning to the previous menu
(5) : Message

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
129 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

D Operating procedure 1 Select the file whose details are required. For example, select “1 NC
BASIC (10).”
2 The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed,
together with the series and edition of the software in each
management unit. After checking the listed data, select the
[SELECT] soft key to return to the file selection screen.

ROM FILE CHECK


NC BASIC

0 B1F1 801A 000


1 B1F1 802A 001
2 B1F1 841A 002 0 B1F1 801A 000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
3 B1F1 842A 003
4 B1F1 881A 004

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
5 B1F1 882A 005 Internal management–unit
number

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6 B1F1 8C1A 006
7 B1F1 8C2A 007 ROM number and edition
Series

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


HIT SELECT KEY.

D Others Parity information for the system file and user file
The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, and other system files in flash ROM
contain parity information in each management unit. If the file name field
or parity field on the check screen contains a non–ASC II character or an
“@” , the flash ROM may have been destroyed or a damaged file may
have been read. Re–read the data from the memory card.
The PMC–RB, PCD 0.5M, and other user files do not contain parity
information in each management unit. A non–ASCII character or an “@”
may appear in the series/edition information. In this case, it does not
indicate that the file has been damaged.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
130 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.2.3
System Data Delete
Screen
D Description This screen is used to delete a user file from flash ROM.
D Screen configuration

(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1/1


(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)
(3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 DG SERVO ( 1)
3 PMC0BSC ( 2)
4 PMC–RB ( 1)
5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)
(4) END

(5) ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1) : Screen title


(2) : Names of accessing board
(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
(4) : Returning to the previous menu
(5) : Message
D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message :

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 To start the deletion, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


DELETING ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.

4 When deletion terminates normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] key.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


DELETING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
131 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

D Others 1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen
The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files,
however, are not protected. Protected system files can be
overwritten from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.

H.2.4
System Data Save
Screen
D Description This screen is used to write a user file in flash ROM to a memory card.
Only user files can be saved from flash ROM to a memory card. System
files cannot be saved.
D Screen configuration

(1) SYSTEM DATA SAVE


(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)
(3) 1 NC BASIC ( 10)
2 DG SERVO ( 1)
3 PMC0BSC ( 2)
4 PMC–RB ( 1)
5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)
(4) END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


(5) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1) : Screen title


(2) : Names of accessing board
(3) : Names of files in flash memory The number of management units
constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file
name.
(4) : Returning to the previous menu
(5) : Message

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
132 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

D Operating procedure 1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the
[SELECT] soft key.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message :

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000

4 When saving terminates normally, the system displays the


following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The names of files
written to the memory card are listed. Check the file names by, for
example, making a note of the list.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000

D Others 1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen
The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against free
copying of the system files.
User files, however, are not protected.
2 Names of saved files
Files saved from flash ROM to a memory card have the following
names :
Flash ROM File name in
Memory card

PMC–RB ³ PMC_RB. XXX


PD1M 0.5 ³ PD1M 05.XXX
P12T 1.0 ³ P12T 10.XXX
CEX1.0M ³ CEX_10M.XXX
CEX 2.0M ³ CEX_20M.XXX

XXX corresponds to the file extension of MS–DOS format files. A


number from 000 to 031 is specified for XXX. For example, if the
PMC–RB file in flash ROM is saved to a memory card that does not yet
contain a file whose name begins with “PMC–RB”, the saved file is
named PMC–RB.000. If, however, that file is saved to a memory card that
already contains a file named PMC–RB.000, the saved file is named
PMC–RB.001. As files are added, the extension is incremented up to a
maximum of PMC–RB.031. Any no–longer used numbers in the
sequence of the extension numbers are used in as cending order. If two
or more files having identical names but different extension numbers are
normally saved to the memory card, check the file names displayed
subsequently.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
133 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

H.2.5
SRAM Data Backup
Screen
D Description This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, programs,
and other data, retained after the CNC power in SRAM is turned off, to
and from a memory card.
D Screen configuration Select “4 SRAM DATA BACKUP” on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN
MENU screen. The following screen is displayed.

(1) SRAM DATA BACKUP


(2) [BOARD:MAIN]
(3) 1. SRAM BACKUP (CNC ³ MEMORY CARD)
2. RESTORE SRAM (MEMORY CARD ³ CNC)
(4) END

(5) SRAM SIZE : 256K (BASIC)


(6) FILE NAME : SRAM256A. FDB

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


(7) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1) : Screen title


(2) : Names of accessing board
(3) : Menu
(4) : Returning to the previous menu
(5) : Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC
(6) : File name
(7) : Message

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
134 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

D Operating procedure
[Backing up data] 1 Select “1. SRAM BACKUP.” The following confirmation message is
displayed. The backup file name may be displayed according to the
SRAM capacity.
2 Press [YES] to start backup.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 If a backup file is already on the memory card, you will be prompted


to confirm whether to permit overwriting.
4 The name of the file being written to the memory card is displayed in
the FILE NAME: field.
SRAM SIZE : 0.5MB (BASIC)
FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A.FDB ³ MEMORY CARD

Name of the file being


∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ saved
SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.

5 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[Restoring the data] 1 Select “2. RESTORE SRAM.” The system displays the following
message. Press the [YES] key.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

2 The system displays the following message during restoration.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.

3 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following


message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
135 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

D Others 1 Name of backup file


The name of the backup file written to the memory card by the SRAM
backup function depends on the size of the SRAM installed in the
CNC.
When the size of SRAM is 1MB or larger, backup files are created in
units of 512 KB.
Number
of 1 2 3 4 5 6
files
SRAM
size
256KB SRAM256A.FDB

0.5MB SRAM0_5A.FDB

1.0MB SRAM1_0A.FDB SRAM1_0B.FDB

2.0MB SRAM2_0A.FDB SRAM2_0B.FDB SRAM2_0C.FDB SRAM2_0D.FDB

3.0MB SRAM3_0A.FDB SRAM3_0B.FDB SRAM3_0C.FDB SRAM3_0D.FDB SRAM3_0E.FDB SRAM3_0F.FDB

The backup file for SRAM on the PMC–RE, CAPII, or LCB board
will have the following extension:
Board MAIN PMC–RE CAPII LCB

Extension FDB PMC CAP LCB

CAUTION
If data such as parameters was restored from a memory
card to SRAM in a system using an absolute pulse coder,
set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to 0, and set the
reference point again.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
136 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.2.6
Memory Card File
Delete Screen
D Description This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.
D Screen configuration

(1) SRAM DATA LOADING 1/1


FILE DIRECTORY
(2) B1F1A_B.MEM
B1F1A_A1.MEM
(3) END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


(4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1) : Screen title. Tlhe current page number (n) and the total number
of pages (m) are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.
(2) : Files on the memory card
(3) : Option for returning to the previous menu
(4) : Message
D Operating procedure 1 Press the [SELECT] key to select the name of the file to be deleted
from the memory card.
2 The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the
[YES] key.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 When a file has been deleted normally, display the following message.
Press the [SELECT] key.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
137 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

H.2.7
Memory Card Format
Function
D Description This function is used to format a memory card. Memory cards must be
formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can be
re–used after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for example,
battery failure.
D Operating procedure 1 From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select “7.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT.”
2 The system displays the following confirmation message.
Press the [YES] key.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 The system displays the following message during formatting :

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.

4 When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the
D following message.
D Press the [SELECT] key.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
138 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.2.8
Load Basic System
Function
D Description The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.
D Operating procedure From the MAIN MENU screen, select “9. END.” The system displays
the “ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO” message. To terminate the
boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the
[NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the main menu.

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

1 After pressing the [YES] soft key


The system checks the NC BASIC system file in the flash ROM. The
system displays the following message :
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

When the NC BASIC system file is found to be normal, the system


sends the system file to DRAM and starts the NC basic system. During
loading, the system blinks the following message.
∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗
LOADING BASIC TO DRAM

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

If the contents of the NC BASIC SYSTEM file are found to have been
damaged or destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection
state, in exactly the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed.
2 If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing
selection state as shown below :

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1-01

1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING


2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT

10.END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
139 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

H.3 The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical
order.
ERROR MESSAGES
AND REQUIRED
ACTIONS

Message Description and required action

B BOOT ROM PARITY. Cause The contents of flash memory containing boot software was
PLEASE POWER OFF. destroyed.
Action Replace the CPU card.

C CHANGE MEMORY CARD. Cause The memory card becomes full in the middle of SRAM backup
AND HIT YES OR NO. operation.
Action Replace the card with a memory card containing enough free
space.

D DELETE ERROR. Cause An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Retry the deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash
ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Replace the
flash ROM module.

DEVICE ERROR (CNC x) Cause An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful.
Action Retry the write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the
flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce
the flash ROM module.

F FILE SAVE ERROR. Cause An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check that the memory card is not damaged.
Note) Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely in-
serted into its slot.

FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE Cause There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file.
Action Delete any unnecessary files from flash ROM.

FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. Cause The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system.
HIT SELECT. Action Put the flash ROM module on the board.

I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE Cause The selected file cannot be read into flash memory.
Action The selected file or the header information for flash ROM may
have been damaged or destroyed.

ILLEGAL FROM MODULE. Cause The flash ROM module ID is illegal.


HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check the drawing No. of the flash ROM module.

ILLEGAL SRAM MODULE. Cause The SRAM module ID is illegal.


HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check the drawing No. of the SRAM module.

L LOADING ERROR. Cause An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Do not touch the memory card while loading data.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
140 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

Message Description and required action

M MAX EXTENSION OVER. Cause The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Delete any unnecessary backup files from the memory card.

MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. Cause The memory card’s battery is exhausted.
HIT SELECT. Action Replace the battery.

MEMORY CARD FULL. Cause The memory card is full.


HIT SELECT KEY. Action Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. Alterna-
tively, replace the memory card with another card having suffi-
cient free space.

MEMORY CARD IS NOT Cause The use of this memory card is not supported.
AVAILABLE. HIT SEL. Action Use only FANUC–recommended memory cards, as de-
scribed in the order list.

MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. Cause The memory card could not be accessed.
HIT SELECT KEY Action Check that the memory card is normal.

MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. Cause The memory card is not inserted into its slot.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check that the memory card is pushed fully home.

MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Cause Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write
SELECT KEY. inhibit switch is set.
Action Disable the write inhibit switch.
Note) Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely in-
serted into its slot.

MEMORY CARD TYPE IS NOT Cause Write has been attempted to an incompatible flash memory
AVAILABLE. card.
Action Use only the flash ROM cards recommended by FANUC.
Recommended flash ROM cards are listed in the ordering list.

MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. Cause Access to a memory card failed.


HIT SELECT KEY. Action The memory card’s battery may have gone dead, the memory
card may have been damaged electrically, or the memory
card may not be inserted in the slot securely.

MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. Cause Access to the memory card has failed.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check whether the memory card is defective.
Note) Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely in-
serted into its slot.

N NMI OCCURRED. Cause A hardware or software error occurred.


PLEASE POWER OFF. Action Determine the procedure which causes the error, and report
it to FANUC together with the series and edition of the boot
software.

P PLEASE FORMAT FLASH TYPE Cause It is not possible to delete only specific files from a flash ROM
CARD.HIT SEL. card, due to the characteristics of the memory used.
Action To delete a file it is necessary to delete all files on the card, by
using the FORMAT function.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
141 inform us,we will delete
H. BOOT SYSTEM
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Message Description and required action

R ROM PARITY ERROR: Cause The NC BASIC is parity error.


NC BASIC. HIT SELECT. Action Check whether NC BASIC is in flash ROM, using SYSTEM
DATA CHECK.

S SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. Cause An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.
HIT SELECT KEY. Action Check that the memory card is normal.
Note) Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its
circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely in-
serted into its slot.

SRAM PARITY OCCURRED. Cause A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM
PLEASE POWER OFF. (Caution).
Action The SRAM areas of all CNCs are cleared before shipment
from the factory so that they are free from parity errors. If,
however, the CNC receives impact during transportation, or
it is left unused for one year or longer, causing the backup bat-
tery to run down, a parity error may occur in the SRAM area.
If a parity error occurs in the SRAM area, the data stored there
is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the CNC may not use
the entire SRAM area. It is when the portion where a parity
error occurred is called that the error is detected by the hard-
ware. If, therefore, a parity error occurs in a portion not ac-
cessed by the CNC, the CNC may operate without any prob-
lems. The SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT, however,
reads the entire SRAM area, and a parity error may be de-
tected during backup although the CNC operates without any
problems. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of
the CNC is not guaranteed and the data cannot be backed up
using the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT. Because, how-
ever, the CNC may operate without any problem, it is recom-
mended that the necessary data be backed up using a floppy
cassette or handy file, all data clear be performed, and then
the data backup be loaded into the CNC. Once all clear is per-
formed, the parity error is eliminated, making it possible to use
the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
142 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16-B/C,

I 18-B/C, 21-TA, Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
143 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

I.1
OUTLINE The P-CODE loader function transfers ROM-format files created by a
personal computer (PC) macro compiler into RAM of CNC. The function
also supports writing to flash ROM (exclude of Series 21–TA).
The CNC is connected to the PC via the RS-232C interface.
The communication parameters for transferring a ROM-format file
(loading) depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. The
parameters must be specified prior to loading.
When the CNC is turned off then back on by simultaneously pressing the
CAN and PROG MDI keys, this function displays the specialized data
transfer screen (loading screen). If Series 16/18–B/C having two–path
control is used, the loading screen is displayed after tool post 1 or 2 is
selected from the tool post selection screen. Data can be transferred only
when the loading screen is displayed.
Specify data transfer from the PC. For details of the transfer command,
see Section 4.3.
While this function is being executed, the CNC power-on sequence is
halted. While the specialized data transfer screen or loading screen is
displayed, the CNC is disabled. This function requires the executor
function and reader/punch control function.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
144 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

I.2
PROCESSING BY
P–CODE LOADER (1) RAM initialization screen
FUNCTION
(2) Loading start screen

(3) Loading screen

(4) Loading end screen

(5) Flash ROM transfer screen (exclude of 21–TA)

(6) Flash ROM transfer end screen (exclude of 21–TA)

I.2.1
Starting the P-code (1) The communication parameters for loading depend on the parameters
Loader Function specified for the CNC. Specify the channel to be used, the baud rate,
and any other necessary parameters beforehand.
(2) Turn off the power of the CNC. Connect the CNC to the PC via the
RS-232C interface.

(3) Simultaneously pressing the CAN and PROG MDI keys of the CNC
turns the CNC on. Keep these keys held down until the MACRO
COMPILER/EXECUTOR P-CODE LOADER title appears on the
screen.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
145 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

I.2.2
RAM Initialization When a Series with two-path control is being used, the path selection
Screen screen is displayed subsequent to the title screen, as shown below.
By pressing the M or S address key, select path 1 or 2.
If the 0 key is pressed, P-CODE loader processing is terminated and the
Series 16/18–B/C system is activated.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)


I/O UNIT = 0
BAUDRATE =11
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

LOADING PATH 1 : YES (PUSH M KEY)


LOADING PATH 2 : YES (PUSH S KEY)
LOADING END : YES (PUSH 0 KEY)

Series with two-path control is being used

When a system other than Series with two-path control is used, the
following screen is displayed. The macro executor RAM is initialized.
If a Series with two-path control is used, the following screen is displayed
after either path is selected. Then, the macro executor RAM is initialized.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER


z This line is displayed only for two–
PATH 1/PATH 2 path control. The same applies to
(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER) the subsequent screens.

I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)


I/O UNIT = 0
BAUDRATE =11
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

OMM D-RAM INITIALIZE

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
146 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

I.2.3 After the RAM is initialized, the screen for starting loading is displayed.
Loading Start Screen
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)


I/O UNIT = 0
BAUDRATE =11
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

LOADING READY ? : YES (PUSH 1 KEY)

Once the PC is ready for data transfer, press the 1 key. The system enters
the loading wait state.
After this screen has been displayed, execute the data transfer command
on the PC, then start data transfer.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADR000000H:00
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0
BAUDRATE =11
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
147 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

I.2.4 When the CNC receives data, the data reception state is indicated, as
Loading Screen shown below.
Under the DATA TRANSFER field, the data being transferred together
with its address, are displayed.
For Series except 21–TA, an asterisk ∗ corresponds to about 16K bytes
for DRAM areas of up to 2M bytes or about 32K bytes for DRAM areas
of up to 3M bytes. For Series 21-TA, an asterisk ∗ corresponds to about
8K bytes.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
148 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

I.2.5
Loading End Screen This screen indicates whether loading has terminated normally.
(Normal termination)
(1) Except Series 21–TA
Once data has been loaded normally, the following screen appears.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

LOADING END : TOTAL xxxxxxxxBYTES


LOADING TO FLASH ROM ? :YES(1)/NO(CAN)
YES (PUSH 1 KEY) / NO (PUSH CAN KEY)

YES (PUSH 1 KEY) : Writing to flash ROM is started.


NO (PUSH CAN KEY) : The processing is terminated.
Specify whether to start writing to the flash ROM.
To start transferring data from RAM to the flash ROM, press the 1 key.
(See Subsec. I.2.6.)
If the (CAN) MDI key is pressed, the following screen is displayed.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

PUSH 1 KEY: CNC START WITH EXECUTER

When the 1 key is pressed, the P-CODE loader function is terminated and
the CNC is started.
If a Series with two-path control is being used, the following message is
displayed.
To return to the path selection screen, press the 1 key.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
149 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER


HEAD 1
(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

PUSH 1 KEY : RETURN TO HEAD SELECTION

(2) For the 21-TA


Once data has been loaded normally, the following screen appears.
Pressing the 1 key on this screen causes the P-CODE loader
processing to be terminated and the CNC to be started.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER


HEAD 1
(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START WITH EXECUTER

If an error occurs during loading, the following error message is


displayed.
To retry loading, press the 1 key. (The processing is repeated, starting
from RAM initialization.)
When you press CAN key and numeric ”1” key on the MDI keyboard, the
P-CODE loader processing is terminated and the CNC is started.
If a Series with two-path control is being used, the path selection screen
is displayed again.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
150 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

(Abnormal termination)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

(ERROR OCCURED)
ILLEGAL CHARACTER

LOADING RESTART ? : YES (PUSH 1 KEY)


: NO (PUSH CAN KEY)

YES (PUSH 1 KEY) : Re-loading into RAM is started.


NO (PUSH CAN KEY) : The processing is terminated.
Specify whether to start re-loading into RAM.
If the executor or reader/punch control function is not selected, the
following message is displayed.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)


I/O UNIT = 0
BAUDRATE =11
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING


I/O OPTION NOTHING
I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING

PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START

Press the 1 key to terminate the P-CODE loader processing and start the
CNC.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
151 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

I.2.6 While data is being transferred from RAM to the flash ROM, the
Flash ROM Transfer following screen is displayed:
Screen (Except Series
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
21)
(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)
ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : EXECUTING

While data is being written to flash ROM, the EXECUTING message


blinks.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
152 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

I.2.7 This screen indicates whether the data transfer to flash ROM terminated
Flash ROM Transfer normally.
End Screen (Except
Series 21) (Normal termination)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE


PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START WITH EXECUTER

Press the 1 key to terminate P-CODE processing and start the CNC.
If a Series with two–path control is being used, the following message is
displayed.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE


PUSH 1 KEY : RETURN TO HEAD SELECTION

Press the 1 key to return to the path selection screen.


If an attempt to load data into flash ROM fails, the following error
message is displayed.
To start re-loading into flash ROM, press the 1 key.
Press the CAN key and then 1 key on the MDI keyboard to terminate the
P-CODE loader processing and start the CNC. The P-CODE previously
loaded into DRAM is effective.
If a Series with two-path control is being used, the tool post selection
screen is displayed again.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
153 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

(Abnormal termination)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADRxxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗
STOP BIT = 1
INPUT CODE = 1

(ERROR OCCURED)
UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT MOUNTED

LOADING RESTART ? : YES(PUSH 1 KEY)


: NO (PUSH CAN KEY)

YES (PUSH 1 KEY) : Re-loading into flash ROM is started.


NO (PUSH CAN KEY) : The processing is terminated.
Specify whether to start re-loading into the flash ROM.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
154 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

I.2.8
Notes (1) The Series except 21–TA uses either channel 1 or 2 for input and
output during loading. The Series except 21–TA cannot use another
channel for loading. The Series 21-TA use channel 1.
(2) Either ASCII or ISO data can be transferred. EIA data is not
supported.
The ASI bit (bit 3 of parameter 101, 111, or 121) specifies whether
ASCII or ISO data is being used.
(3) The I/O parameters on the loading screen indicate the values of the
RS-232-C parameters related to (1) and (2) above. The parameters
cannot be specified using the loading screen.
(4) Even if the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) for overwrite loading
is set to 1, the operation of the macro compiler determines whether
both the P-CODE and executor sections are transferred or if only the
P-CODE section is transferred.
(5) When no data is written to the FLASH ROM or data is deleted from
the FLASH ROM, set the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) to 0 so
that the data including the executor section is loaded.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
155 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

I.3
Address
PARAMETER 0020 I/O DEVICE SELECTION : I / O C H A N N E L

Setting Entry
[Data type] : Byte
[Data range] : 0 to 3
Select an I/ O device used.
0 : Select a device connected to channel 1.
(I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD)
1 : Select a device connected to channel 1.
(I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD)
2 : Select a device connected to channel 2. (Except Series 21–TA)
(I/O device connected to JD5B on MAIN CPU BOARD)
I/O device usable with P- CODE LOADER is either channel 1 or 2.

NOTE
The Series 21-TA use channel 1.

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 ASI SB2

[Data type] : Bit


SB2 : Number of stop bits:
0 : 1 bit
1 : 2 bits
ASI : Input data code:
0 : ISO
1 : ASCII

NOTE
EIA code cannot be used for P-CODE LOADER.

Address
0102 Specification no. of I/O device (when I/O channel=0)

[Data type] : Byte


Set a specification number of I/O device when I/O Channel=0 according
to Table 1.
Table 1

Set value Specification of I/O device


0 RS–232–C
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate
FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR
FANUC FLOOPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 Unused
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL G
FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL H

Set 0 for P-CODE LOADER.


www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
156 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

Address
0103 Baud rate (For I/O CHANNEL=0)

[Data type] : Byte


Set a baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=0 according to Table 2.
Table 2

Set Baud rate Set Baud rate Set Baud rate


1 50 5 20 9 2400
2 100 6 300 10 4800
3 110 7 600 11 9600
4 150 8 1200 12 19200

Set the same baud rate as the personal computer for P-CODE LOADER.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0111 ASI SB2

[Data type] : Bit


These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=1. Meaning of each bit
is the same as parameter No. 0101.

Address
0112 Specification number of I/O device (for I/O CHANNEL=1)

[Data type] : Byte


Set specification number of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1
according to Table 1.

Address
0113 Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=1 )

[Data type] : Byte


Baud rate of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 2.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0121 ASI SB2

[Data type] : Bit


These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=2. The meaning of each
bit is the same as parameter No. 101.

Address
0122 Specification number of I/O device (I/O CHANNEL=2)

[Data type] : Byte


Set the specification number of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2
according to Table 1.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
157 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Address
0123 Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=2 )

[Data type] : Byte


Set baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 2.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8701 PLD

[Data type] : Bit


PLD : P-CODE Loader of Macro Compiler/Executer
0 : Clears RAM and rewrites all contents.
1 : Do not clear RAM and overwrites it.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
158 inform us,we will delete
I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C,
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

I.4
ALARMS
Message Meaning
EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING OR NO Possible causes are as follows:
SPACE IN D-RAM 1) No macro executor option has been selected.
2) No macro capacity option has been selected.
3) An area of the capacity specified with the macro capacity option cannot
be allocated in D-RAM.
4) The area allocated with the macro capacity option is being used by the C
executor.
I/O OPTION NOTHING Reader/puncher control 1 option is not selected.
I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING Reader/puncher control 2 option is not selected.
ILLEGAL CHANNEL A channel other than channel 1 and 2 is selected.
ILLEGAL CHARACTER Transferred data is not correct.
OVERRUN Overrun error.
FRAMING ERROR Framing error.
DSR SIGNAL OFF Communication error.
PARITY ERROR Data with no parity was transferred.
CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error.
MEXE NOT FOUND No executer part exists. Execute loading including executer part.
FILE SIZE OVER The size of P-CODE to be loaded exceeds the size of D-RAM.
HEADER NOT FOUND There is no header that is used for writing data in F-ROM. There may be no
”-s” instruction in transfer command.
UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT F-ROM module is unknown or not mounted.
MOUNTED
ILLEGAL ID INFORMATION F-ROM file ID is incorrect.
NO SPACE There is no space in F- ROM module.
ERASE ERROR Deletion of F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.
PROGRAM ERROR Writing in F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
159 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 20) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

J P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)

The P-CODE loader function transfers ROM-format files created by a


personal computer (PC) macro compiler into RAM of CNC. The function
also supports writing to flash ROM.
The CNC is connected to the PC via the RS-232C interface.
The communication parameters for transferring a ROM-format file
(loading) depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. The
parameters must be specified prior to loading.
Display an IPL menu by turning on the power while pressing the two most
lefthand soft keys. The P-code loader function can be executed on the IPL
menu.

Press and hold down these two soft keys.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
160 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 20)

J.1
IPL MENU
FS20 IPL MENU

1 FILE CLEAR
2 P CODE LOADER
END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT ITEM AND HIT [SELECT] KEY.

[ UP ][ DOWN ][ ][ ][ SELECT ]

(a) Select a mode by pressing the [UP] and [DOWN] soft keys, then
press the [SELECT] soft key.

1. FILE CLEAR : Clears files such as offsets and


programs
2. P CODE LOADER : Loads ROM-format files (P-CODE
files). If no reader/punch control
option is provided, the P-code
loader menu is not displayed.
END : Terminate IPL processing and starts
the system

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
161 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 20) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

J.2 The P-CODE loader function performs processing as follows. At each


step the appropriate menu is displayed.
PROCESSING FLOW
(a) RAM initializing menu
FOR THE P–CODE #
LOADER FUNCTION (b) Loading start menu
#
(c) Loading menu
#
(d) Loading end menu
#
(e) Menu for transferring data into flash ROM memory
#
(f) Menu for end of transfer of flash ROM memory

J.2.1 When the P-CODE loader function is executed, the function starts
initializing the RAM area.
RAM Initializing Menu
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)


I/O UNIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
BAUDRATE =11 ––––––––––––––––
STOP BIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
INPUT CODE = 1 ––––––––––––––––

OMM RAM MODULE INITIALIZE

[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
162 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 20)

J.2.2 Upon completion of RAM area initialization, the loading start menu is
Loading Start Menu displayed.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)


I/O UNIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
BAUDRATE =11 ––––––––––––––––
STOP BIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
INPUT CODE = 1 ––––––––––––––––

LOADING READY ? : YES/NO

[ ][ ][ YES ][ NO ][ ]

[ YES ] : Starts loading data into DRAM.


[ NO ] : Cancels loading data (IPL menu reappears).
Once preparations for data transfer have been completed on the personal
computer, press the [YES] soft key. The CNC enters the data reception
wait state. To start data transfer, execute the data transfer command (see
Section 4.3) from the personal computer.

J.2.3
Loading Menu When the CNC receives data, the data reception state is indicated, as
shown below.
Under the DATA TRANSFER field, the data being transferred together
with its address, are displayed.
An asterisk ∗ corresponds to about 8k bytes.

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADR xxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 1 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––
STOP BIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
INPUT CODE = 1 ––––––––––––––––
––––––––––––––––

OMM RAM MODULE INITIALIZE

[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
163 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 20) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

J.2.4
Loading End Menu When loading ends, either of the following screens appears to indicate
whether loading terminated normally. (For normal termination)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADR xxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 1 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––
STOP BIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
INPUT CODE = 1 ––––––––––––––––
––––––––––––––––

LOADING END : TOTAL xxxxxxxx BYTES


LOADING TO FLASH ROM ? : YES/NO

[ ][ ][ YES ][ NO ][ ]

[ YES ] : Starts writing data into flash ROM memory.


[ NO ] : Cancels writing data into flash ROM memory (IPL menu
reappears).
Specify whether writing data into flash ROM memory is started by
selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

(For abnormal termination)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADR xxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 1 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––
BAUDRATE =11 ––––––––––––––––
STOP BIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
INPUT CODE = 1 ––––––––––––––––
––––––––––––––––
(ERROR OCCURED)
ILLEGAL CHARACTER

LOADING RESTART ? : YES/NO

[ ][ ][ YES ][ NO ][ ]

[ YES ] : Starts reloading data into DRAM.

NOTE
Reloading data is started after DRAM is initialized.

[ NO ] : Terminates loading (IPL menu reappears).


www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
164 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 20)

NOTE
The IPL menu reappears after DRAM is initialized.

Specify whether reloading data into DRAM is started by selecting the


[YES] or [NO] soft key.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
165 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 20) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

J.2.5 The following menu is displayed while data is being transferred from
Menu for Transferring DRAM into flash ROM memory.
Data into FLASH ROM
MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER
Memory
(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)
ADR xxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 1 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––
STOP BIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
INPUT CODE = 1 ––––––––––––––––
––––––––––––––––

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : EXECUTING

[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]

While data is being loaded into flash ROM memory, ”EXECUTING”


blinks.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
166 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 20)

J.2.6 When transferring data into flash ROM memory is completed, either of
Menu for end of the following screens appears to indicate whether the transfer terminated
normally.
Transfer of FLASH
ROM Memory
(For normal termination)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADR xxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 1 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––
STOP BIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
INPUT CODE = 1 ––––––––––––––––
––––––––––––––––

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE

[ ][ ][ ][ ][ END ]

[ END ] : Terminates the P-code loader function (IPL menu


reappears).

(Abnormal termination)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER

(I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER)


ADR xxxxxxH:xx
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB)
I/O UNIT = 1 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗–––––––––––
STOP BIT = 1 ––––––––––––––––
INPUT CODE = 1 ––––––––––––––––
––––––––––––––––
(ERROR OCCURED)
ILLEGAL CHARACTER

LOADING RESTART ? : YES/NO

[ ][ ][ YES ][ NO ][ ]

[ YES ] : Starts reloading data into flash ROM memory.


[ NO ] : Terminates loading (IPL menu reappears).
Specify whether reloading data into flash ROM memory is started by
selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
167 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 20) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

J.2.7
Notes (1) The Series 20 uses either channel 1 or 2 for input and output during
loading. The Series 20 cannot use another channel for loading.
(2) Either ASCII or ISO data can be transferred. EIA data is not
supported.
The ASI bit (bit 3 of parameter 101, 111, or 121) specifies whether
ASCII or ISO data is being used.
(3) The I/O parameters on the loading screen indicate the values of the
RS-232-C parameters related to (1) and (2) above. The parameters
cannot be specified using the loading screen.
(4) Even if the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) for overwrite loading
is set to 1, the operation of the macro compiler determines whether
both the P-CODE and executor sections are transferred or if only the
P-CODE section is transferred.
(5) For the first loading after the RAM module is mounted, set the PLD
bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) to 0 so that the data including the
executor section is loaded.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
168 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 20)

J.3
PARAMETER Address
0020 I/O DEVICE SELECTION : I/O CHANNEL

Setting Entry
Data type : Byte
Data range : 0 to 3
Select an I/ O device used.
0 : Select a device connected to channel 1.
(I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD)
1 : Select a device connected to channel 1.
(I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD)
2 : Select a device connected to channel 2.
(I/O device connected to JD5B on MAIN CPU BOARD)
I/O device usable with P- CODE LOADER is either channel 1 or 2.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 ASI SB2

Data type : Bit


SB2 : Number of stop bits:
0 : 1 bit
1 : 2 bits
ASI : Input data code:
0 : ISO
1 : ASCII

NOTE
EIA code cannot be used for P-CODE LOADER.

Address
0102 Specification no. of I/O device (when I/O channel=0)

Data type : Byte


Set a specification number of I/O device when I/O Channel=0 according
to Table 1.
Table 1

Set value Specification of I/O device


0 RS–232–C
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE
B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate
FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR
FANUC FLOOPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 Unused
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
Set 0 for P-CODE LOADER.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
169 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 20) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Address
0103 Baud rate (For I/O CHANNEL=0)

Data type : Byte


Set a baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=0 according to Table 2.

Table 2

Set Baud rate Set Baud rate Set Baud rate


1 50 5 20 9 2400
2 100 6 300 10 4800
3 110 7 600 11 9600
4 150 8 1200 12 19200

Set the same baud rate as the personal computer for P–CODE LOADER.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0111 ASI SB2

Data type : Bit


These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=1. Meaning of each bit
is the same as parameter no. 101.

Address
0112 Specification number of I/O device (for I/O CHANNEL=1)

Data type : Byte


Set specification number of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1
according to Table 1.

Address
0113 Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=1 )

Data type : Byte


Baud rate of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 2.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0121 ASI SB2

Data type : Bit


These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=2. The meaning of each
bit is the same as parameter no. 101.

Address
0122 Specification number of I/O device (I/O CHANNEL=2)

Data type : Byte


Set the specification number of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2
according to Table 1.

Address
0123 Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=2 )

Data type : Byte


Set baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 2.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
170 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX (FOR Series 20)

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8701 PLD

Data type : Bit


PLD : P-CODE Loader of Macro Compiler/Executer
0 : Clears RAM of macro compiler and rewrites all contents.
1 : Do not clear RAM of macro compiler and overwrites it.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
171 inform us,we will delete
J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION
(FOR Series 20) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

J.4
ALARMS Message Meaning
EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING Macro executer option is not
equipped.
I/O OPTION NOTHING Reader/puncher control 1 option is
not selected.
I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING Reader/puncher control 2 option is
not selected.
ILLEGAL CHANNEL A channel other than channel 1 and 2
is selected.
ILLEGAL CHARACTER Transferred data is not correct.
OVERRUN Overrun error.
FRAMING ERROR Framing error.
DSR SIGNAL OFF Communication error.
PARITY ERROR Data with no parity was transferred.
CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error.
UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR F-ROM module is unknown or not
NOT MOUNTED mounted.
ILLEGAL ID INFORMATION F-ROM file ID is incorrect.
NO SPACE There is no space in F- ROM module.
ERASE ERROR Deletion of F-ROM failed. F-ROM
may be defective.
PROGRAM ERROR Writing in F-ROM failed. F-ROM may
be defective.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
172 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

K BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
173 inform us,we will delete
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

K.1
OUTLINE The boot system of the Series 15-B/15i-A first loads the CNC system
software (Flash Memory (F-ROM) → DRAM), then starts execution of
the CNC software so that other software can be executed.
The Series 15-B/15i-A boot system supports the following system
maintenance functions:
(1) Registering a file in F-ROM
D Reads a file to flash memory from an MS-DOS format memory card
conforming to JEIDA V4.1.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in F-ROM
(3) Deleting a file from F-ROM
(4) Writing a file in F-ROM to a memory card
(5) Registering a ROM-format file stored on a macro cassette (ROM
cassette) into F-ROM (only series 15-B)
This appendix describes how to register/delete macro programs into/from
the Series 15-B/15i-A by using the above functions.

CAUTION
1 Memory card handling
A memory card can be inserted or removed while the power
is on. While the boot system is running, however, insert or
remove a memory card only while the main menu is
displayed.
2 ROM cassette handling (Only Series 15-B)
Turn off the power before attempting to insert or remove a
ROM cassette.

* For the Series 15–B and 15i–A, the display numbers and order may
differ. The operation method is, however, the same. In the text of this
manual, the screens of the Series 15–B are used. For details of the
Series 15i–A, refer to the Maintenance Manual (B–63325EN).

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
174 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

K.2
MEMORY CARD (a) Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS For the Series 15-B/15i-A boot system, commercially available
memory cards conforming to the following specification can be used:
AND RESTRICTIONS Format : JEIDA Ver. 4 or above
Capacity : 512K bytes or more (for macro compilers)
(b) Size of MEM-format file
The following table lists the maximum size of a MEM-format file
which can be saved to a memory card:
MEM-format file Size in memory card
256K bytes 262272 bytes (256K bytes + 128 bytes)
512K bytes 524416 bytes (512K bytes + 128 bytes)

NOTE
A MEM-format file cannot be split and saved to two or more
memory card. Always prepare a memory card having a
capacity greater than the size of the MEM-format file to be
saved. Two or more MEM-format files can be saved to a
single memory card.

(c) Restrictions imposed on the boot system


The boot system can access only those files in the root directory. Files
in a subdirectory cannot be accessed. In principle, for the boot
system, do not use a memory card containing a subdirectory.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
175 inform us,we will delete
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

K.3
STARTING THE The starting procedure depends on whether a MEM-format file is loaded
from a memory card into F-ROM or whether a ROM-format file is loaded
BOOT SYSTEM from a ROM cassette.
Starting procedure
Main menu item ”Page Up” key, ”Page ”⇐”, ”⇒”
Down” key (Only Series 15–B)
SYSTEM DATA LOAD- Loads a file from a Loads a file from a ROM
ING memory card into F- cassette into F-ROM.
ROM.
SYSTEM DATA CHECK Lists the files, registered in F-ROM, and checks
the file.
SYSTEM DATA SAVE Saves a file, registered in F-ROM, to a memory
card.

”Page Up” key, ”Page Down” key: Turn the power on while holding down
the Page Up and Page Down keys.
”⇐”, ”⇒”: Turn the power on while holding down the ⇐ and ⇒ cursor
keys. (Only Series 15–B)

In both cases, the following boot system title screen appears.

RAM TEST : END


ROM TEST : END 6014 H
DRAM ID : 0000
SRAM ID : 0000
FROM (CNC) : 0023
FROM (PMC) : PASS
CNC DATA SEARCH : sEND

Fig. K.3 (a) Boot System Title Screen

The contents vary with the system being used.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
176 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

After power-on, releasing the pressed keys causes the following boot
system main menu to be displayed:

SYSTEM MONITOR

1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING


2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
4. FILE DATA BACKUP
5. END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT MODE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.3 (b) Boot System Main Menu

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
177 inform us,we will delete
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

K.4
REGISTERING A (1) Insert the memory card in the memory card interface of the CNC unit.
MEM–FORMAT FILE,
STORED ON A PMC PSU

MEMORY CARD,
INTO F–ROM

Series 15-B

Memory card

Fig. K.4 (a) Mounting of a Memory Card

NOTE
The PMC slot is used as the memory card interface (Main
slot in case of series15i–A). The memory card can be
inserted or removed while the power is turned on. When the
boot system is active, make sure that the main menu [see
Fig. K.3 (b)] is displayed on the screen before inserting or
removing the memory card. Otherwise, proper access is not
made, and the contents of the memory card files may be
destroyed.

(2) Turn on the power of the CNC unit while holding down the page-up
and page-down keys. Then the boot system is activated. Refer to
”K.3. STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM”.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
178 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

(3) Select ”2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK” using the cursor keys and press
the input key. The contents of F-ROM are retrieved, and the
following information is displayed on the screen:

SYSTEM DATA CHECK


FILE DIRECTORY
1. OPTIONA3 ( 2)
2. HELP MSG ( 2)
3. DG SERVO ( 1)
4. NC BASIC (10)
5. PCD 256A ( 2)
6. PMC-NA0B ( 1)
7. MCR-CMPA ( 2)
END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.4 (b) DATA CHECK DIRECTORY Screen

Check this screen to see if any MEM format file are (hereinafter called a
P–CODE file) registered. If a MEM format file is already registered, its file
name is displayed (see the table below).

Table K.4 R CODE file names


D Series 15–B
File name Description
PCD 256A For systems without a sub-CPU (256K bytes)
PCD 512A For systems without a sub-CPU (512K bytes)
PCD 256M For systems with a sub-CPU (256K bytes)
PCD 512M For systems with a sub-CPU (512K bytes)

D Series 15i–A
File name Description
PD1M 256K 256 KB for M system
PD1M 0.5M 512 KB for M system
PD1M 1.0M 1024 KB for M system

(4) If a P-CODE file is already registered, delete it. To delete a P-CODE


file, select it with the cursor, then press the ”delete” key. When no
P-CODE file is registered, proceed to step 7.
(5) The message ”DELETE OK?” appears. Make sure that the selected
file is a P-CODE file, then press the input key. If the wrong file has
been selected, press the cancel key. The DATA CHECK
DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.4 (b)] is then displayed again.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
179 inform us,we will delete
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

CAUTION
When an attempt is made to delete a system file, such as
a CNC program or the macro compiler, the message
”PROTECT FILE” appears on the screen and the attempt is
rejected. However, the system deletes user files, such as
the PMC ladder, without asking for confirmation. Once
deletion has started, the process cannot be halted. If no
backup file exists on a memory card or another storage
medium, the contents of the file cannot be restored in any
way. To avoid such inadvertent deletion of files, make sure
that the correct file has been selected before deleting it.
Also, back up user files at appropriate intervals.

(6) When the file has been successfully deleted, the message ”DELETE
COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The DATA CHECK
DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.4 (b)] 1 is then displayed again.
Confirm that the P-CODE file is no longer listed.
(7) Select ”END” and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]
is then displayed again.
(8) Select ”1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING” using the cursor keys, then
press the input key. The directories in the memory card are listed on
the screen.

Title
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
FILE DIRECTORY

1. LADDER1. ROM
2. LADDER2. ROM
3. TEST. DAT
4. MACRO. ROM
END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.4 (c) DATA LOADING DIRECTORY Screen

CAUTION
If a ROM cassette error occurs, check the title. When the
boot system has been activated by holding down the
page-up and page-down keys, the title should read:
SYSTEM DATA LOADING.
If this title is not displayed, turn off the system power once,
then turn it on again.

(9) Select the P-CODE file using the cursor keys, then press the input key.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
180 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

(10)The message ”OK? INPUT/CANCEL” appears. To register the


selected program, press the input key. To not register the selected file
cancel, press the ”cancel” key. The DATA LOADING DIRECTORY
screen [see Fig. K.4 (c)] is then displayed again.

CAUTION
The boot system registers any file having the acceptable
format. Once registration has started, it cannot be halted.
If no backup file exists on a memory card or another storage
medium, the previously saved data of the file cannot be
restored in any way. To avoid such inadvertent registration
of files, make sure that the correct file has been selected
before registering it. Also, back up files at appropriate
intervals.

(11)When the file has been successfully registered, the message


”PROGRAM COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The
DATA LOADING DIRECTORY screen [see Fig. K.4 (c)] is then
displayed again.
(12)Select ”END” and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]
is then displayed again.
(13)Select ”2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK” to retrieve the contents of
F-ROM. After confirming that the P-CODE file has been registered,
press the input key to return the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)].
(14)Select ”END” on the main menu and press the input key. The blinking
message ”LOADING CNC DATA” appears. The CNC starts up
about ten seconds later.
(15)Make sure that the registered P-CODE file operates normally.
(16)Remove the memory card from the memory card interface. The card
can be removed even when the CNC power is on.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
181 inform us,we will delete
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

K.5
SAVING A (1) Insert the memory card in the memory card interface of the CNC unit
to activate the boot system. See steps 1 and 2 of Sec.K.4, Procedure
MEM–FORMAT FILE for registering a P-CODE file in a memory card to F-ROM.
FROM F–ROM TO A (2) Select ”3. SYSTEM DATA SAVE” using the cursor keys, then press
MEMORY CARD the input key. The contents of F-ROM are retrieved, and the
following information is displayed on the screen:

SYSTEM DATA SAVE


FILE DIRECTORY
1. OPTIONA1 ( 2)
2. HELP MSG ( 2)
3. DGTL SRV ( 1)
4. NC BASIC (10)
5. PCD 256A ( 2)
6. PMC-NA0B ( 1)
7. MCR-CMPA ( 2)
END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.5 DATA SAVE DIRECTORY Screen


(3) Select one of the P-CODE files listed below using the cursor, then
press the input key.
D Series 15–B
File name Description
PCD 256A For systems without a sub-CPU (256K bytes)
PCD 512A For systems without a sub-CPU (512K bytes)
PCD 256M For systems with a sub-CPU (256K bytes)
PCD 512M For systems with a sub-CPU (512K bytes)

D Series 15i–A
File name Description
PD1M 256K 256 KB for M system
PD1M 0.5M 512 KB for M system
PD1M 1.0M 1024 KB for M system

NOTE
System files, such as the CNC program or the micro
compiler, cannot be saved (if you attempt to save one of
these files, the message ”PROTECT FILE” is displayed).

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
182 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

(4) The message ”INPUT FILE NAME” appears. Input the file name
using the MDI key. A file must be named according to MS-DOS file
naming rules; that is, a file name consisting of up to eight characters
followed by a three-character or shorter extension. During file name
input:
D The cursor can be moved using the cursor (² and ³) keys.
D The cancel key functions as the backspace key.
D Pressing the reset key displays the DATA SAVE DIRECTORY
screen [Fig. K.5] again.
D Characters are input in the overwrite mode.
(5) After inputting the file name, press the input key to save the file.
(6) If the save operation terminates normally, the message ”SAVE
COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The DATA SAVE
DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.5] is then displayed again.
(7) Select ”END” and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]
is then displayed again.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
183 inform us,we will delete
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

K.6
REGISTERING A (1) Connect the ROM cassette into which the program has been written
using System P or a personal computer to the ROM cassette adapter
ROM–FORMAT FILE, (A20B-2000-0760).
STORED ON A ROM
CASSETTE, INTO
F–ROM
ROM ROM cassette adapter
cassette (A20B-2000-0760)

Fig. K.6 (a) Connection of the ROM Cassette to the ROM Cassette Adapter

(2) Turn off the power of the CNC unit, then insert the ROM cassette
adapter into the mini slot of the CNC unit. The mini slot is on the PSU
and is protected with a cover when not in use.

PMC PSU

Series 15-B

ROM cassette

ROM cassette adapter

Fig. K.6 (b) Connection of the ROM Cassette Adapter to the CNC Unit

CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the power of the CNC unit before inserting
or removing the ROM cassette. Inserting or removing the
adapter while the CNC power is on can not only damage the
CNC unit and the ROM cassette but can also destroy
battery-retained data, such as NC programs and
parameters.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
184 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

(3) Turn on the power of the CNC unit while holding down the cursor (←
and →) keys, and the boot system is activated. Refer to ”K.3
STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM”.
(4) Check the contents of F-ROM. If a P-CODE file is already registered,
delete it. For the deletion procedure, see 2 Procedure for registering
a P-CODE file in a memory card to F-ROM, steps (3) to (7) in
Sec.K.4.
(5) Select ”SYSTEM DATA LOADING” using the cursor keys, then
press the input key. The following contents of the ROM cassette are
read and displayed on the screen:

SYSTEM DATA LOADING (CASSETTE) Title

P-CODE 256K (WITHOUT SUB-CPU) ROM type


Format file

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗


SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.6 (c) DATA LOADING DIRECTORY Screen (for ROM Cassette)

The type of mounted ROM cassette (ROM format file) is displayed (see the table
below). If the displayed ROM cassette type does not agree with that of the
connected ROM cassette, check the ROM cassette.
ROM cassette/ROM format file Description
1M-bit ROM without a sub-CPU P-CODE 256K (without sub-CPU)
2M-bit ROM without a sub- CPU P-CODE 512K (without sub-CPU)
1M-bit ROM with a sub-CPU P-CODE 256K (with sub-CPU)
2M-bit ROM with a sub-CPU P-CODE 512K (with sub-CPU)

CAUTION
If an alarm related to the memory card occurs or when
displaying memory card directories, confirm the title. When
the CNC unit has been activated with the cursor (² and ³)
keys pressed down, the title should read:
SYSTEM DATA LOADING (CASSETTE)
If this title is not displayed, activate the CNC unit again.

(6) The message ”OK? INPUT/CANCEL” appears. To register the


P-CODE file, press the input key. To not resister the P-CODE file,
press the ”cancel” key. Then the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then
displayed again.
(7) When the file has been successfully registered, the message
”PROGRAM COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The
main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
185 inform us,we will delete
K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A) APPENDIX B–66102E/10

(8) Select ”2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK” to retrieve the contents of


F-ROM. After confirming that the P-CODE file has been registered
in F-ROM. Press the input key to return the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)].
(9) Turn off the power of the CNC unit, and remove the ROM cassette
adapter from the mini slot. After removing the adapter, place the
cover over the slot to protect it.

CAUTION
Avoid using the CNC unit while the ROM cassette remains
in its mini slot. If the CNC unit is used without removing the
ROM cassette, the data stored in the ROM cassette takes
precedence, disabling the use of the micro compiler and
P-CODE file program resident in F-ROM.

(10)Make sure that the registered P-CODE file operates normally.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
186 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

K.7
TYPES OF FILES IN The following table lists the macro compiler/executer file names
displayed on the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen:
F–ROM
D Series 15–B
Displayed name Type Description
MCR-CMPA S Macro compiler for systems without a sub-CPU
MCR-CMPM S Macro compiler for systems with a sub-CPU
PCD 256A U Macro program (256K bytes) for systems without
a sub-CPU
PCD 512A U Macro program (512K bytes) for systems without
a sub-CPU
PCD 256M U Macro program (256K bytes) for systems with a
sub-CPU
PCD 512M U Macro program (512K bytes) for systems with a
sub-CPU

D Series 15i–A
Displayed name Type Description
PD1M 256K U 256 KB for M system
PD1M 0.5M U 512 KB for M system
PD1M 1.0M U 1024 KB for M system

Type Symbols:
S : System file supplied by FANUC. The following operations cannot
be performed on system files:
D Saving to a memory card
D Deletion from F-ROM

NOTE
The system files are necessary when a custom macro
program is directly compiled by the Series 15-B.

U: Data file created by the user. All supported file access operations
can be performed.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
187 inform us,we will delete
L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY APPENDIX B–66102E/10

L NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY

Library file names of macro library are listed below:

Table L.1 List of Macro Library File Names

System name Specification Library file name Remarks


MACRO LIBRARY (0) A08B–9001–J600#ZZ03 FOMC_xx.MEX Series 0–MC
FOTC_xx.MEX Series 0–TC
FOTTC_xx.MEX Series 0–TC (Sub side)
FANUC Series 0i A08B–9001–J764#ZZ03 F0IMA_xx.MEX Series 0i–MA
MACRO LIBRARIES F0ITA_xx.MEX Series 0i–TA
MACRO LIBRARY (16) A08B–9001–J610#ZZ03 F16MA_xx.MEX Series 16–MA
F16TA_xx.MEX Series 16–TA
F16TTS xx.MEX Series 16–TTA (Sub side)
F16LR_xx.MEX For loader control (Model A)
F16MB_xx.MEX Series 16–MB
F16MMB xx.MEX Series 16–MB (Sub side)
F16TB_xx.MEX Series 16–TB
F16TTB xx.MEX Series 16–TB (Sub side)
F16LTB xx.MEX For T Series loader control (Model B)
F16LMB xx.MEX For M Series loader control (Model B)
F16MC_xx.MEX Series 16–MC
F16MMC xx.MEX Series 16–MC (Sub side)
F16TC_xx.MEX Series 16–TC
F16TTC xx.MEX Series 16–TC (Sub side)
F16LTC xx.MEX For T Series loader control (Model C)
F16LMC xx.MEX For M Series loader control (Model C)
FANUC Series 16i–A A08B–9001–J760#ZZ07 F16MI_xx.MEX Series 16i–MA
MACRO LIBRARIES F16TI_xx.MEX Series 16i–TA
F16TMM_xx.MEX Series 16i–TMM (Sub side/M series)
F16TMT_xx.MEX Series 16i–TMT (Main side/T series)
FANUC Series 16i–B A08B–9001–J830#ZZ07 16IMB_xx.MEX Series 16i–MB
MACRO LIBRARIES 16ITB_xx.MEX Series 16i–TB
16TMMB_xx.MEX Series 16i–TMB (Sub side/M series)
16TMTB_xx.MEX Series 16i–TMB (Main side/T series)
MACRO LIBRARY (18) A08B–9001–J625#ZZ03 F18MA_xx.MEX Series 18–MA
F18TA_xx.MEX Series 18–TA
F18TTSxx.MEX Series 18–TTA (Sub side)
F18LR_xx.MEX For loader control (Model A)
F18MB_xx.MEX Series 18–MB
F18TB_xx.MEX Series 18–TB
F18TTBxx.MEX Series 18–TB (Sub side)
F18LTBxx.MEX For T Series loader control (Model B)
F18LMBxx.MEX For M Series loader control (Model B)
F18MC_xx.MEX Series 18–MC
F18TC_xx.MEX Series 18–TC
F18TTCxx.MEX Series 18–TC (Sub side)
F18LTCxx.MEX For T Series loader control (Model C)
F18LMCxx.MEX For M Series loader control (Model C)
FANUC Series 18i–A A08B–9001–J765#ZZ07 F18MI_xx.MEX Series 18i–MA
MACRO LIBRARIES F18TI_xx.MEX Series 18i–TA
F18TMM_xx.MEX Series 18i–TMM (Sub side/M series)
F18TMT_xx.MEX Series 18i–TMT (Main side/T series)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
188 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY

System name Specification Library file name Remarks


FANUC Series 18i–B A08B–9001–J831#ZZ07 F18IMB_xx.MEX Series 18i–MB
MACRO LIBRARIES F18ITB_xx.MEX Series 18i–MB
18TMMB_xx.MEX Series 18i–TMB (Sub side/M series)
18TMTB_xx.MEX Series 18i–TMB (Main side/T series)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J613#ZZ03 F16LA_xx.MEX Series 16–LA
(16 P/L/W) F16PA_xx.MEX Series 16–PA
F16WA_xx.MEX Series 16–WA
F16LB_xx.MEX Series 16–LB
F16PB_xx.MEX Series 16–PB
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J620#ZZ03 F15_A_xx.MEX Series 15–A W/0 sub
(15A) F15_B_xx.MEX Series 15–A with sub (Main side 256K
byte)
F15_C_xx.MEX Series 15–A with sub (Sub side 256K
byte)
F15_D_xx.MEX Series 15–A with sub (Main side 512K
byte)
F15_E_xx.MEX Series 15–A with sub (Sub side 512K
byte)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J640#ZZ03 F15B_Axx.MEX Series 15–B W/O sub 256K byte
(15B) F15B_Bxx.MEX Series 15–B W/O sub 512K byte
F15B_Cxx.MEX Series 15–B with sub (Main side 256K
byte)
F15B_Dxx.MEX Series 15–B with sub (Sub side 256K
byte)
F15B_Exx.MEX Series 15–B with sub (Main side 512K
byte)
F15B_Fxx.MEX Series 15–B with sub (Sub side 512K
byte)
FANUC Series 15i A08B–9001–J640#ZZ07 F15IA_xx.MEX For Series 15i–MA
MACRO LIBRARIES
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J690#ZZ03 F20MA_xx.MEX Series 21–MB (D201 series)
(21MB)
F21MB_xx.MEX Series 21–MB (DDA1 series)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J633#ZZ03 PMDT_xx.MEX Series 21–TA (8860 series)
(21TA)
F21TA_xx.MEX Series 21–TA (8865,8866 series)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J639#ZZ03 F21TB_xx.MEX Series 21–TB (controller A) (DE01 se-
(21TB) ries)
F21TBN_xx.MEX Series 21–TB (controller B) (DEA1 se-
ries)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J639#ZZ03 F21LTB_xx.MEX Series 21–TB (loader control)
(21TB)
FANUC Series 21i–A A08B–9001–J769#ZZ07 F21MI_xx.MEX Series 21i–MA
MACRO LIBRARIES F21TI_xx.MEX Series 21i–TA
FANUC Series 21i–B A08B–9001–J832#ZZ07 F21IMB_xx.MEX Series 21i–MB
MACRO LIBRARIES F21ITB_xx.MEX Series 21i–TB
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J670#ZZ03 DZ70_xx.MEX Series 20–FA (512K byte)
(20F G)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J671#ZZ03 DZ71_xx.EE1 With Series 20–FA Guidance Program-
(20F GP) DZ71_xx.EE2 ming function (1M byte)
POC PRG.SRC
FACE PRG.SRC
DRILL PR.SRC
SIDE PRG.SRC
With Series 20–TA Guidance Program-
ming function

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
189 inform us,we will delete
L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY APPENDIX B–66102E/10

System name Specification Library file name Remarks


MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J672#ZZ03 DZ72_xx.MEX Series 20–FA (1M byte)
(20F GB)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J673#ZZ03 DZ73_xx.EX1 With Series 20–FA Guidance Program-
(20F GPB) DZ73_xx.EX2 ming function (1.5M byte)
POC PRG.SRC
FACE PRG.SRC
DRILL PR.SRC
SIDE PRG.SRC
With Series 20–TA Guidance Program-
ming function
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J675#ZZ03 DZ75_xx.MEX Series 20–TA (512K byte)
(20T G)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J676#ZZ03 DZ76_xx.EX1 With Series 20–TA Guidance Program-
(20T GP) DZ76_xx.EX2 ming function (1M byte)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J677#ZZ03 DZ77_xx.MEX Series 20–TA (1M byte)
(20T GP)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J678#ZZ03 DZ78_xx.EX1 With Series 20–TA Guidance Program-
(20T GPB) DZ78_xx.EX2 ming function (1.5M byte)
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J750#ZZ03 DZ62_xx.MEX For Series 20–FA (1 MB)
(20F B) The FANUC standard machining guid-
ance cannot be used.
MACRO LIBRARY A08B–9001–J751#ZZ03 DZ63_xx.EX1 For Series 20–FA (1.5 MB)
(20F GB) DZ63_xx.EX2 The FANUC standard machining guid-
ance cannot be used.
With guidance programming function

NOTE
xx in a library file name indicates the edition of the library.

Executer file is defined as follows.


Series 15–A
CNC system/ROM cassette type CNC= CNC2= CNC3=
without SUB CPU / 256Kbyte F15_A_xx.MEX nothing
without SUB CPU / 512Kbyte F15_A_xx.MEX nothing
nothing
with SUB CPU / 256Kbyte F15_B_xx.MEX F15_C_xx.MEX
with SUB CPU / 512Kbyte F15_D_xx.MEX F15_E_xx.MEX

Series 15–B
CNC system/Kind of P–CODE file CNC= CNC2= CNC3=
without SUB CPU / 256Kbyte F15B_Axx.MEX nothing
without SUB CPU / 512Kbyte F15B_Bxx.MEX nothing
nothing
with SUB CPU / 256Kbyte F15B_Cxx.MEX F15B_Dxx.MEX
with SUB CPU / 512Kbyte F15B_Exx.MEX F15B_Fxx.MEX

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
190 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

M PARAMETERS

This section describes the compiler parameters and executor parameter


for the CNC system excluding Series 15.
For the parameters of Series 15, refer to the manuals listed below.,
1) FANUC Series 15 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro
executor) (B–61213E–1)
2) FANUC Series 15–MODEL B Programming Manual (Macro
Compiler/Macro executor) (B–62073E–2)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
191 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

M.1 The compile parameters are initialized to the values set in the P–CODE
file at power–up. The parameters cannot be changed from MDI or others.
SERIES 15i COMPILE However, parameters 8547 and 8548, which are used for debugging, can
PARAMETERS be set from MDI.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8500 LD6 R10 R05

R05
R10 Size of P–CODE file
R10 R05 Size of P–CODE file
0 0 256Kbyte
0 1 512Kbyte
1 0 1Mbyte
1 1 Not defined
LD6 = 1: This bit must always be set 1.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8502 NPE TMC EUI VAR DBG SBK DIR

DIR = 0 : The program list screen does not show P–CODE macro
program numbers.
= 1 : The program list screen shows P–CODE macro program
numbers.

NOTE
P–CODE macro program names cannot be displayed.

SBK = 0 : When the conversational macro or auxiliary macro is


executed with the debug function, continuous execution
is performed.
= 1 : When the conversational macro or auxiliary macro is
executed with the debug function, single–block
execution is performed.
DBG = 0 : The debug function is not used.
= 1 : The debug function is used.
VAR = 0 : The P–CODE macro variable screen cannot be displayed.
= 1 : The P–CODE macro variable screen can be displayed.
EUI = 0 : The P–CODE macro uses UI00 to UI15 and UO00 to
UO15 as UI/UO signals.
= 1 : The P–CODE macro uses EUI00 to EUI15 and EUO00
to EUO15 as UI/UO signals.
TMC = 0 : An execution macro call by a T code is a subprogram call
of O90000.
= 1 : An execution macro call by a T code is a macro call of
O90008.
NPE = 0 : Under RS–232–C control, % (EOF) is automatically
output.
= 1 : Under RS–232–C control, % (EOF) is not automatically
output.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
192 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8503 MV7 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1 MV0

8504 MVA MV9 MV8 ECK

= 0 : P–CODE macro common variables (#100 to #999) are also


used as custom macro common variables.
= 1 : P–CODE macro common variables (#100 to #999) are
independent of custom macro common variables.
The following bits of the two parameters set the range of
common variables.
No.8503
MV0 : #100 to 149 MV1 : #150 to 199 MV2 : #500 to 549 MV3 : #550 to 599
MV4 : #600 to 699 MV5 : #700 to 799 MV6 : #800 to 899 MV7 : #900 to 999
No. 8504
MV8 : #200 to 299 MV9 : #300 to 399 MVA : #400 to 499
ECK = 0 : Command input variable #8501 does not expand the
command keys that can be read.
= 1 : Command input variable #8501 expands the command
keys that can be read.
After the expansion, the following command keys can be
read:
Function Function Function
22 POS 23 PROG 24
menu key key key

Function Function Function


OFFSET
SETTING 25 CUSTOM 26 System 27
key key key

Function Function Function


MESSAGE
28 GRAPH 29 30
key key key

NOTE
If the expansion is performed, pressing any of the command
keys does not terminate the conversational macro function.
Accordingly, the corresponding screen is not displayed.
Conversational macro start control variable #8510 must be
set to 0 to terminate the conversational macro function.

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8507 PWS NTV CAN

CAN = 0 : While the system is waiting for data transmission or


reception under reader/puncher interface control, no
interruption can be made by pressing the CAN key.
= 1 : While the system is waiting for data transmission or
reception under reader/puncher interface control, an
interruption can be made by pressing the CAN key.
NTV = 0 : G336 (data transmission) outputs a blank character for
performing a TV check.
= 1 : G336 (data transmission) does not output a blank
character for performing a TV check.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
193 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

PWS = 0 : The P–CODE work number search is disabled.


= 1 : The P–CODE work number search is enabled.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8508 PGR CLG B5C SSC TEC AC2 AC1

AC1 =0: A subprogram call (O9004) by a special code is disabled.


=1: A subprogram call (O9004) by a special code is enabled.
AC2 =0: A subprogram call (O9005) by a special code is disabled.
=1: A subprogram call (O9005) by a special code is enabled.
TEC =0: A subprogram or macro call by a T code is disabled.
=1: A subprogram or macro call by a T code is enabled.
SSC =0: A subprogram call by an S code is disabled.
=1: A subprogram call by an S code is enabled.
BSC =0: A subprogram call by the secondary miscellaneous
function code is disabled.
=1: A subprogram call by the secondary miscellaneous
function code is enabled.
CLG =0: Cutting distance summation/preset (#8554) is disabled.
=1: Cutting distance summation/preset (#8554) is enabled.
PCR =0: CNC program referencing/writing, cutting distance
summation/preset, and RS–232–C control are disabled.
=1: CNC program referencing/writing, cutting
distancesummation/preset, and RS–232–C control are
enabled.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8509 GMP PTC MCT EV2 EV1

EV1 = 0 : Expansion P–CODE variables (#40000 and after) are


floating–point data.
= 1 : Expansion P–CODE variables (#40000 and after) are
integer data.
EV2 = 0 : P–CODE variables (#30000 and after) are floating–point
data.
= 1 : P–CODE variables (#30000 and after) are integer data.
MCT = 0 : A modal macro call by a G code is a move command call
(equivalent to G66).
= 1 : A modal macro call by a G code is a call in each block
(equivalent to G66.1).
PTC = 0 : When a macro variable is output, EOB is output as LF.
= 1 : When a macro variable is output, EOB is output as LF CR
CR.
GMP = 0 : The following calls are enabled: call by an M, S, T,
secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by
an axis address during a G–code call, and a G–code call
during a call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous
function, or special code or by an axis address.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
194 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

= 1 : The following calls are disabled: call by an M, S, T,


secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by
an axis address during a G–code call, and a G–code call
during a call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous
function, or special code or by an axis address. (This type
of call is processed as a normal NC command.)

Address
8510 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9001

8511 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9002

8512 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9003

Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99)


These parameters specify M codes of subprogram
calls for calling programs 9001, 9002, and 9003.
Address
8513 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9010

8514 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9011

8515 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9012

8516 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9013

8517 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9014

8518 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9015

8519 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9016

8520 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9017

8521 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9018

8522 G code of subprogram call for calling program 9019

Valid data range : –999 to 999 (excluding 0, 65, 66, and 67)
These parameters specify G codes of macro calls for
calling programs 9010 to 9019.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
195 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Address
8523 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9020

8524 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9021

8525 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9022

8526 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9023

8527 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9024

8528 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9025

8529 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9026

8530 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9027

8531 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9028

8532 M code of subprogram call for calling program 9029

Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99)


These parameters specify M codes of macro calls for
calling programs 9020 to 9029.

Address
8533 M code of subprogram call for calling a user program

Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99)


This parameter specifies an M code of subprogram
call for calling a user program.

Address
8536 Main program number of conversational macro

Valid data range : 1 to 99999999


This parameter specifies the main program number
of the conversational macro.

NOTE
1 The program number of this parameter is set in the
conversational macro execution control variable at
power–up.

Address
8537 Main program number of auxiliary macro

Valid data range : 1 to 99999999


This parameter specifies the main program number
of the auxiliary macro.

NOTE
1 The program number of this parameter is set in the auxiliary
macro execution control variable at power–up.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
196 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

Address
8538 Call code of subprogram call by a range specification M code (lower limit)

8539 Call code of subprogram call by a range specification M code (upper limit)

Valid data range : 1 to 9999


These parameters specify the range of call codes of
subprogram calls by a range specification M code.

NOTE
1 If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of
parameter 8538 is greater than the value of parameter
8539, the subprogram call by a range specification M code
is disabled.
2 M30, M98, M99, and M codes used for macro and
subprogram calls are not used as call codes even if the
codes are included in the specified range.

Address
8540 Transmission/receptionwait time–out period (s)

Valid data range : 0 to 180


This parameter specifies a time–out period for the
transmission/reception wait state brought by the
send/receive function (G335 to G338) under
reader/puncher interface control. If 0 is specified, no
time–out occurs.
Address
8544 Call address of subprogram call by a special code (O9004)

8545 Call address of subprogram call by a special code (O9005)

Valid data range : 65(A) to 90(Z) (excluding O, N, P, L, G, and axis


names)
These parameters specify call addresses of
subprogram calls by a special code.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
197 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Address
8546 Number of G–code macro calls (multiple) to be defined

8551 First G code for G–code macro calls (multiple)

8552 First program number of G–code macro calls (multiple)

Valid data range : Parameter 8546: 1 to 255


Parameter 8551: –9999 to 9999 (excluding 0)
Parameter 8552: 1 to 9999
Parameter 8546 specifies the number of G–code
macro calls (multiple) to be programmed. Parameter
8551 specifies the first one of the code numbers used
for the calls. Parameter 8552 specifies the first
program number of the execution macro.
If a negative value is specified in parameter 8551, a
modal call is executed. The MCT bit (bit 2 of
parameter 8509) specifies whether the modal call is
executed as a move command call (G66) or as a call
in each block (G66.1).

NOTE
The G–code macro call (multiple) is disabled in the following
cases:
1 A value beyond the valid range is specified in any of the
parameters.
2 The highest G code exceeds 9999.
3 The highest program number exceeds 9999.
G65, G66, G67, and G codes specified for macro calls are
not used as call codes even if they are included in the range.

Address
8547 Number of the conversational or auxiliary macro program in which a break occurs

Valid data range : 0 to 99999999


This parameter specifies the number of the
conversational or auxiliary macro program in which
a break is caused by the debug function.

NOTE
If either this parameter or parameter 8548 is set to a
non–zero value when the conversational macro is
executed, a break is enabled. The program number
specified in this parameter and the sequence number
specified in parameter 8548 are set as break conditions.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
198 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

Address
8548 Number of the conversational or auxiliary macro sequence in which a break occurs

Valid data range : 0 to 99999999


This parameter specifies the number of the
conversational or auxiliary macro sequence in which
a break is caused by the debug function.

NOTE
If either this parameter or parameter 8547 is set to a
non–zero value when the conversational macro is
executed, a break is enabled. The sequence number
specified in this parameter and the program number
specified in parameter 8547 are set as break conditions.

Address
8549 Number of P–CODE variables (#30000 and after)

Valid data range : 0 to 100


This parameter specifies the number of P–CODE
variables.
The setting of the EV2 bit (bit 1 of parameter 8509)
affects the number of variables that are actually
defined, as follows:
When EV2 is set to 0 (floating point data):
(Value of parameter 8549) 40
Wen EV2 is set to 1 (integer data):
(Value of parameter 8549) 100

Address
8550 Number of expansion P–CODE variables (#4000 and after)

Valid data range : 0 to 1970


This parameter specifies the number of expansion
P–CODE variables.
The setting of the EV1 bit (bit 0 of parameter 8509)
affects the number of variables that are actually
defined, as follows:
When EV1 is set to 0 (floating–point data):
(Value of parameter 8550) 10
Wen EV1 is set to 1 (integer data):
(Value of parameter 8550) 30
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8555 X08 X07 X06 X05 X04 X03 X02 X01

8556 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X10 X09 X08

8557 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X19 X18 X17

= 0 : A macro call by an axis address is disabled.


= 1 : A macro call by an axis address is enabled.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
199 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

The bits of the parameters select different axes.


No.8555
X01 : First axis
X02 : Second axis
:
No. 8504 :
X24 : Twenty–fourth axis
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8558 ACA P98 15I PWT XDL ACS

ACS = 0 : A macro call by an axis address always calls O9009.


= 1 : A macro call by an axis address calls a program
depending on the axis.
First axis ! Calls O9031.
Second axis ! Calls O9032.
:
n–th axis ! Calls a program having an O number of
9030 + n.
XDL = 0 : Interlock along an axis is disabled.
= 1 : Interlock along an axis is enabled.
PWT = 0 : The conversational macro function is not executed at
power–up.
= 1 : The conversational macro function is executed at
power–up.
The position display screen is normally displayed at
power–up, but the conversational macro function can be
executed to display a special screen.
15I = 0 : The macro executor function follows Series 15–B
compatible specifications.
= 1 : The macro executor function follows original
specifications for the Series 15i.
This bit selects the following specifications:
Series 15–B specifications Series 15i specifica-
Function
(15I = 0) tions (15I = 1)
Character coordi- X0 to 73, Y0 to 26 X0 to 79, Y0 to 26
nate system
System display part FS15–B FS15i
Soft key frame
Key input line Y22 Y23
Command key input The INSERT, ALTER, and The keys can be read.
variable by parame- DELETE keys cannot be INSERT : 31
ter 8501 read. ALTER : 32
DELETE : 33
Method of execut- Sequential execution (After Parallel execution
ing both auxiliary the program end command of
macro and con- the auxiliary macro is
versational macro executed, the conversational
macro is executed.)
Alarm information of When a foreground PS alarm When a foreground PS
window function or MC alarm is issued alarm is issued. An
(foreground PS MC alarm can be read
alarm of alarm basic with basic flag 2.)
flags)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
200 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

P98 = 0 : The execution macro for P–CODE work number search


is called by a macro call. A local variable used by the
execution macro cannot be used in the main program.
= 1 : The execution macro for P–CODE work number search
is called by a subprogram call. A local variable used by
the execution macro is taken over to the main program.
ACA = 0 : A macro call by a T code or axis address always passes
an argument without decimal point as an integer value.
= 1 : A macro call by a T code or axis address passes an
argument without decimal point, adding a decimal point
according to the setting of the DPI bit (bit 0 of parameter
2400).

Address
8570 Graphic coordinate system shift amount (X–axis)

8571 Graphic coordinate system shift amount (Y–axis)

Valid data range : –320 to 319 (X–axis), –216 to 231 (Y–axis)


These parameters specify the shift amounts of the
graphic coordinate system in dots.
Address
8572 Address of the interlock mode signal of an axis

8573 Bit position of the interlock mode signal of an axis

Valid data range : 0 to 7


These parameters specify a PMC internal relay (R
area) signal that determines the control mode of the
interlock function of an axis.
Address : R area number
Bit position : Bit position of the signal

NOTE
The interlock function of an axis is disabled when:
1 The address refers to a position beyond the R area.
2 The bit position is incorrect.

Address
8574 P–CODE common variable (#500 to #999) protect range (top)

8575 P–CODE common variable (#500 to #999) protect range (bottom)

Valid data range : 500 to 999


These parameters specify the range of
battery–backed P–CODE common variables (#500
to #999) to be write–protected.

NOTE
If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of
parameter 8574 is larger than the value of parameter 8575,
no write protection is provided.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
201 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Address
8576 P–CODE common variable (#200 to #499) protect range (top)

8577 P–CODE common variable (#200 to #499) protect range (bottom)

Valid data range : 200 to 499


These parameters specify the range of
battery–backed P–CODE common variables (#200
to #499) to be write–protected.

NOTE
If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of
parameter 8576 is larger than the value of parameter 8577,
no write protection is provided.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
202 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

M.2
PARAMETERS
OTHER THAN
SERIES 15i

M.2.1
Compile Parameters
NOTE
Usually, undefined parameters need to be set to 0.

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Compile
9000 M3MB M2MB M1MB M512 M256 M128
parameter

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Compile
9001 M4MB
parameter

M4MB M3MB M2MB M1MB M512 M256 M128


4.0MB 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
3.0MB 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
2.0MB 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1.0MB 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
512KB 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
256KB 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
128KB 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

NOTE
1 For the 21-TB (controller A), always specify 128 KB.
2 For the Series 16, a 128-KB ROM-format file cannot be
specified.
3 For the 21-MB or, 21-TB (controller B), no more than 1.0 MB
can be specified.
4 For the 0i–A, no more than 512 KB can be specified.

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9002 EXT1 PWSR DAUX XDIL EVF ACL2 ACL1 TCAL

TCAL =0: Makes invalid the sub-program call with T code


=1: Makes effective the sub-program call with T code
ACL1 =0: Makes invalid call by the specific code
=1: Makes effective call by the specific code (O9004/#146)
ACL2 =0: Makes invalid call by the specific code
=1: Makes effective call by the specific code (O9005/#147)
EVF =0: Extension P-CODE variable #20000 is the floating
decimal point format
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
203 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

= 1 : Extension P-CODE variable #20000 is the fixed decimal


format
XDIL = 0 : Axis interlock function invalid
= 1 : Axis interlock function valid
DAUX = 0 : Does not make the CUSTOM screen appear at power on
= 1 : Makes CUSTOM screen appear at power on
PWSR = 0 : P CODE work number search function invalid
= 1 : P CODE work number search valid
EXT1 = 0: Extension functions invalid
= 1: Extension functions valid (RS-232-C control, NC
program access)

CAUTION
When EXT1=1, part program memory reduces by 1.63m
D Series 16/18–A (part program storage of up to 80m)
D Series 20 (part program storage of up to 80m)
D Series 21–MB (D201 series, part program storage of up
to 80m)
D Series 21–TB (control unit A)

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9003 PTCR KY20 HRGR ONMSK

ONMSK= 0 : The O and N numbers are displayed on the CUSTOM


screen.
= 1 : The O and N numbers are not displayed on the CUSTOM
screen.
HRGR = 0 : Standard mode graphic display
= 1 : High resolution graphic mode display (set to H1I
usually)
KY20 = 0 : Not +a to #8501 with decimal point input by key input
variables
= 1 : +a to #8501 with decimal input by key input variables
(+a: +20 for a display with 7 soft keys, +40 for a display
with 12 soft keys)
PTCR = 0 : Does not output ”CR” code twice in P-CODE variable
outputting
= 1 : Output ”CR” code twice in P-CODE variable outputting
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9004 CUTLG NOP_B HRGC IMG SP_G_C SP_G_B

SP_G_B, SP_G_C
00 : Standard G code system
01 : G code system B
10 : G code system C
11 : G code system C
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
204 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

IMG = 0 : 16-T type (Special G code)


= 1 : 16-G type (Special G code)
HRGC = 0 : 9I high resolusion monochrome CRT, standard
= 1 : 9I high resolution monochrome CRT, brightness
modulation mode setting (paint)
NOP_B = 0 : When no other address is specified in a block that calls
a subprogram by a T or M code, the block is executed.
= 1 : The block is not executed.
CUTLG = 0 : Does not count cutting distance
= 1 : Count cutting distance
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9005 TMACC AXCLS AX4CL AX3CL AX2CL AX1CL

AX1CL = 0 :Macro program call by the 1st address is invalid


=1: Macro program call by the 1st address is valid
AX2CL = 0 :Macro program call by the 2nd address is invalid
=1: Macro program call by the 2nd address is valid
AX3CL = 0 :Macro program call by the 3rd address is invalid
=1: Macro program call by the 3rd address is valid
AX4CL = 0 :Macro program call by the 4th address is invalid
=1: Macro program call by the 4th address is valid
AXCLS = 0 :Always program O9009 is called irrespective of
specified axes.
= 1 : The program number to be called depends on a specified
axis:
Program O9031 is called when 1st axis is specified.
Program O9032 is called when 2nd axis is specified.
: :
Program O9038 is called when 8th axis is specified.
TMACC= 0 : Macro call by T code is invalid
= 1 : Macro call by T code is valid
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9006 NNUM US19W CNCHG DAUXR STDM KEYC DIOC

DIOC = 0 : Standard UI:G54/G55 and UO:F54/F55 are used for


UI/UO(#1000-#1132) of execution macro/
conversational macro.
= 1 : UI:G82/G83 and UO:F84/F85 are used for UI/UO
(#1000-#1132) of execution macro/ conversational macro.
KEYC = 0 : When KEY switch =0, completion code #8529=254 in an
access to NC program
= 1 : KEY switch is not cheched in an access to NC program
STDM = 0 : The mode and status display is changed on the USER-1,
USER-2, and USER-3 screens on which the
conversational macro screen is displayed.
= 1 : The mode and status display is left unchanged on the
USER-1, USER-2, and USER-3 screens on which the
conversational macro screen is displayed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
205 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

DAUXR :
The conversational macro screen is displayed when
power is turned on while the system is in the emergency
stop state or external reset state.
(Parameter DAUX (No. 9002, #5) must also be set to 1.)
CNCHG : Execution of the conversational macro is continued when
the CUSTM key is pressed while the conversational
macro screen is displayed.
US19W : The screen for the 9” CRT type is displayed on the 14”
CRT type. (USER-1 screen)
NNUM = 0: When data input control is valid for the CUSTOM screen,
the NUM prompt is displayed.
= 1: When data input control is valid for the CUSTOM screen,
the NUM prompt is not displayed.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9007 US19WK TIVR2 TIVR1 TIDSP

TIDSP : The common conversational macro screen for the 2–path


control is specified.

NOTE
This setting is validated only for the PATH-2 cassette.
Both TTDSP and CNCHG (No. 9006, #4) cannot be set to
1 at the same time.)

TIVR1 :
Common conversational macro variables (#10000 to
#19999) are specified.
(1: For variables #10000 to #19999, areas #10000 to
#19999 of the other path are used.)
TIVR2 : Common conversational macro variables (#20000 to
#29999) are specified.
(1: For variables #20000 to #29999, areas #20000 to
#29999 of the other path are used.)
US19WK= 0 : When display with 12 soft keys is selected, the position
of the key–in line is not changed on a window having
seven soft keys.
= 1 : When display with 12 soft keys is selected, the position
of the key–in line is changed on a window having seven
soft keys.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9008 HRGCC HCAR MDLP AX8CL AX7CL AX6CL AX5CL

AX5CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 5th axis address is made


invalid.
= 1 : Macro program call by the 5th axis address is made valid.
AX6CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 6th axis address is made invalid.
= 1 : Macro program call by the 6th axis address is made valid.
AX7CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 7th axis address is made invalid.
= 1 : Macro program call by the 7th axis address is made valid.
AX8CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 8th axis address is made invalid.
= 1 : Macro program call by the 8th axis address is made valid.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
206 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

MDLP = 0 : A G code to cancel modal calling cannot be used to call


a macro to be executed.
= 1 : A G code to cancel modal calling can be used to call
O9006.
MCARG= 0 : In macro calling of G/M codes, P/L/N/G is not argument.
= 1 : In macro calling of G/M codes, P/L/N/G is argument.
HRGCC = 0 : Does not set the character display screen to brightness
modulation mode.
= 1 : Sets the character display screen to brightness
modulation mode.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9009 RSRST

RSRST = 0 : When the NC is reset, a conversational macro does not


suspends reader/punch control.
= 1 : When the NC is reset, a conversational macro suspends
reader/punch control. (Completion code #8539 = 12)

Address
9010 M code that calls sub-program O9001

9011 M code that calls sub-program O9002

9012 M code that calls sub-program O9003

9013 G code that calls custom macro O9010

9022 G code that calls custom macro O9019

9023 M code that calls sub-program O9020

9032 M code that calls sub-program O9029

9033 M code that calls user program

9034 G code that to cancel the modal call

9035 M code calls sub-program O9001

9036 M code calls sub-program O9002

Parameters 9035 and 9036 specify the bit signal of the internal PMC relay
(R area) that determines the control mode of the interlock function for a
single axis direction.
Signal number (0 to 999): Specifies the number of the internal PMC
relay (R area).
Signal position (0 to 7): Specifies the bit position of the signal.
Example) When parameters 9035 and 9036 are set to 900 and 7
respectively
The interlock function for a single axial direction is validated when the
internal PMC relay (R900, #7) is set to 1 in the JOG or HNDL mode.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
207 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

Address
9037 Used number of (1/100) of conversational macro exclusive variable

9038 Conversational macro execlusion program at the time of power supply input (CUSTOM screen 1)

9039 Auxility macro execution program number

9040 Conversational macro execution program number at the time of power on (CUSTOM screen 2)

9041 Conversational macro execution program number at the time of power on (CUSTOM screen 3)

9042 M code call by area specification, lower limit M code

9043 M code call by area specification, upper limit M code

9044 Used number of extension conversational macro variables

9045 Starting G code in G code calls of ,range specification

9046 Number of G codes in G code calls of ,range specification

9047 Starting O number in G code calls of ,range specification

Distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the con-


9048
versational macro screen (in the X direction)

Distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the con-


9049
versational macro screen (in the Y direction)

These parameters specify the distance by which the graphics coordinate


system is shifted on the conversational macro screen in units of dots.
Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9100 MSFT C9WN DLMT VKLM VGCL VGAR

VGAR = 0 : The CUSTOM screen is displayed with a background


color.
= 1 : The CUSTOM screen is not displayed with a background
color.
VGCL = 0 : The CUSTOM screen is displayed with a background in
a background color.
= 1 : The CUSTOM screen is not displayed with a background
in a background color.
(Usually, set 0.)
VKLN = 0 : Key–in line background display is performed.
= 1 : Key–in line background display is not performed.
DLMT = 0 : The range of display with a color background is limited
to a data area.
= 1 : The range of display with a color background is not
limited to a data area.
(Usually, set 0.)
C9WN = 0 : In a window displayed with seven soft keys, coordinate
correction is performed for character display.
= 1 : In a window displayed with seven soft keys, coordinate
correction is not performed for character display. (Valid
only when a background color is provided.)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
208 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

MSFT = 0 : A soft key frame is not displayed on the CUSTOM


screen.
= 1 : A soft key frame is displayed on the CUSTOM
screen. (Valid only when no background color is
provided.)

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
209 inform us,we will delete
M. PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–66102E/10

M.2.2
Executer Parameter Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9000 L2R MKG RSC EXS STP NDP SQN

SQN = 1 : Displays program number of recorded program and


sequence number during execution of a recorded program.
= 0 : Displays program number and sequence number of called
user program during execution of a recorded program.
NDP = 1 : Displays variables for P-CODE program.
= 0 : Does not display variables for P-CODE program.
STP = 1 : Stops execution of conversational macro program. (”1” is
set by break function automatically)
= 0 : Execute the conversational macro program.
EXS = 1 : Execute macro statement till the next NC statement has
come with feed hold, during macro statement execution at
execution level.
= 0 : Stop if feed hold acts, during macro statement execution at
execution level.
RSC = 1 : Common variables #100-#149 are cleared to <vacant> if NC
is reset.
= 0 : Common variables #100-#149 do not clear to <vacant> if
NC is reset.
MKG : Be sure to set to 0.
L2R = 1 : Does not display conversational / auxiliary macro and screen
during execution macro operation.
= 0 : Display conversational / auxiliary macro and screen during
execution macro operation.

Address
9002 Conversational macro break program number

9003 Conversational macro break sequence number

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
210 inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX M. PARAMETERS

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9010 MA8 MA7 MA6 MA5 MA4 MA3 MA2 MA1

MA1 = 1 : Masks a first axis address macro call.


=0: Does not mask a first axis address macro call.
MA2 = 1 : Masks a second axis address macro call.
=0: Does not mask a second axis address macro call.
MA3 = 1 : Masks a third axis address macro call.
=0: Does not mask a third axis address macro call.
MA4 = 1 : Masks a fourth axis address macro call.
=0: Does not mask a fourth axis address macro call.
MA5 = 1 : Masks a fifth axis address macro call.
=0: Does not mask a fifth axis address macro call.
MA6 = 1 : Masks a sixth axis address macro call.
=0: Does not mask a sixth axis address macro call.
MA7 = 1 : Masks a seventh axis address macro call.
=0: Does not mask a seventh axis address macro call.
MA8 = 1 : Masks an eighth axis address macro call.
=0: Does not mask an eighth axis address macro call.

NOTE
When compilation parameter bit 4 of No. 9005 (AXCLS) is
set to 1, MA1 masks O9031, MA2 masks O9032, MA3
masks O9033, and so on.

Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
9011 MTC

MTC = 1 : Masks a T code execution macro call.


= 0 : Does not mask a T code execution macro call.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
211 inform us,we will delete
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T
LOADING TO FLASH ROM APPENDIX B–66102E/10

N Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM

The FANUC Super CAP T is produced by the custom macros and macro
executor. The FANUC standard conversational automatic function is also
realized by the custom macros. This specification describes the way of
compiling the macros and linking and loading the Super CAP T system
software into a flash rom module in NC system.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
212 inform us,we will delete
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX LOADING TO FLASH ROM

N.1 Before the system installation, please install a memory card adapter in
your personal computer.
SYSTEM
INSTALLATION (1) Installing the FANUC MACRO Compiler System Software
Install the the FANUC MACRO compiler system software as
(SETUP) follows.
1. Insert the disk marked FANUC MACRO COMPILER SYSTEM
v3.1 into the appropriate disk drive.
2. Enter the following command and follow the on–screen
instructions:
?: MSETUP <in> <out> (example: B:\MSETUP B: C: )
?: :The root directory of disk drive.
<in> :Specify the name of the disk drive.
<out> :Specify the drive name of the hard disk to install the software.
The following directories are created once the installation is
complete.
\MCOMP \TOOL \TOOL: The FANUC MACRO Compiler
system software, batch document
\MEX files,and so forth are stored.
\USR \SAMPLE \MEX : Executor directory
\USR : User directory

This specification assumes as follows.


B drive : 5 inch floppy disk
C drive : hard disk
(2) Path Setting
Installed software tools are in \MCOMP\TOOL directory. So modify
your ”AUTOEXEC.BAT” file to contain the following DOS
command entry.
example) PATH=C:\MCOMP\TOOL
(3) Installing the Macro Executor File
Copy the macro executor file from the disk marked MACRO
LIBRAY (16TB SCAP) 1/3 to 3/3
*In explanation, ”BH0F” is the series and ”_01” is version for
example.
Executor files consists of three files,
BH0F_01. EX1
BH0F_01. EX2
BH0F_01. EX3
COPY B:BH0F_01. EX1 C:\MCOMP\MEX
COPY B:BH0F_01. EX2 C:\MCOMP\MEX
COPY B:BH0F_01. EX3 C:\MCOMP\MEX
(4) Installing the Macro Source File.
Copy the macro source file from the disk maked MACRO LIBRAY.
COPY B:*.SRC C:\MCOMP\USR *.SRC: Macro source file

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
213 inform us,we will delete
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T
LOADING TO FLASH ROM APPENDIX B–66102E/10

N.2
COMPILING Command
MCOMP0 file–spec (*1)
(*1) file–spec : Specify a macro program source.
(example)
MCOMP0 BH0F_01
The following files are created once the compiling is complete
normally.
BH0F_01.REL Relocatable file
BH0F_01.REF Reference file
BH0F_01.LST List file
MCOMP0 CAPS_01
The following files are created once the compiling is complete
normally.
CAPS_01.REL Relocatable file
CAPS_01.REF Reference file
CAPS_01.LST List file

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
214 inform us,we will delete
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX LOADING TO FLASH ROM

N.3
LINKING (1) Specifying the File to Link
(example)
BH0F.LNK

CNC = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX1
CNC2 = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX2 Executor file
CNC3 = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX3
/:
P9000 = 10100000
P9001 = 10000001
P9002 = 11000000
P9003 = 10001001 Compile parameter
P9007 = 01000000
P9033 = 97
P9037 = 7
P9044 = 2044
/:
FILE = \MCOMP\USR\BH0F_01 Relocatable file
FILE = \MCOMP\USR\CAPS_01 (Compiled macro
sourceis specified.)
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
/:

This link file ’BH0F.LNK’ realizes a standard macro function.


In case that new macro source is created, add the file name to this link
file.
(2) Execution of linking
Command
MLINK file–spec (*3)
(*3) file–spec :Specify a link file.
(example)
MLINK BH0F
The following files are created once the linking is complete normally.
BH0F.ROM Rom file
BH0F.MAP Map file
If a link error occurs, the error message is displayed and the linking
is aborted.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
215 inform us,we will delete
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T
LOADING TO FLASH ROM APPENDIX B–66102E/10

N.4
WRITE TO THE (1) Execution of MMCARD
MEMORY CARD Convert the rom file to memory card file.
Command
MMCARD file–spec (*4)
(*4) file–spec :Specify a rom file.
(example)
MMCARD BH0F
The following files are created once the ”MMCARD” command is
complete normally.
BH0F.MEM Memory card file
(2) Write to Memory Card
Write the memory card file ”BH0F.MEM” to a memory card with
memory card adapter.
For writing, refer to your memory card adapter’s manual.

NOTE
To write the Super CAP T system software, a 4MByte size
card is needed.
Both S–RAM type card and F–ROM type card can be used.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
216 inform us,we will delete
N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T
B–66102E/10 APPENDIX LOADING TO FLASH ROM

N.5 According to as follows, load the Super CAP T system software into a
flash rom module in NC system.
LOADING TO FLASH
1. Insert the memory card into the main boad of NC system.
ROM MODULE 2. Turn on the power with pushing the both softkey key of
F10(second on the right) and F11(most right)
3. In SYSTEM MONITOR SERVICE MENU, select ”1.SYSTEM
DATA LOADING”.
4. Select ”BH0F.MEM”.
5. Loading to flash rom starts. Select ”END” when the loading is
complete.
6. In SYSTEM MONITOR SERVICE MENU, select ”9.END”.

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please
217 inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 Index
[A]
Alarms, 159, 172
[F]
Features, 2
[B] Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21),
153
Boot Slot Configuration Screen, 124
Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21), 152
Boot System (for Series 15–B/15i–A), 173
Free Area in Flash Memory (Series 20), 120
Boot System (for Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B),
97 Functions, 13
BOOT SYSTEM (For Series 16i/18i/21i), 122

[G]
[C] GP–IB Interface Setting (for Sereis 0, 15–A, 16–A,
18–A), 34
CAP Control Module, 87
Compile Error Code Table, 53
Compile Parameters, 203, 210 [H]
Compile/Link Example, 57 How to View Reference List/Compile List, 36
Compiler Series, 11
Compiling, 214
Conversion of Table Data with the Macro Linker [I]
(Mlink), 83
Installing the Executor File from the FANUC MAC-
Conversion to a Memory Card Format (MMCARD) RO Library Floppy Disk, 9
(This Function is Used in the Series
15–B/16–B/16–C/18–B/18–C/20/21–B/16 i–A/18i–A Installing the System from the FANUC MACRO
/21i–A.), 26 Compiler System Floppy Disk, 7

Creating Link Files, 92, 95 Introduction, 80


IPL Menu, 161
Creating Programs, 91, 94
Creating Programs by Using Super Cap II M/Super
Cap II T with Series 16i/18i, 84
Creating Sample User Modules for SUPER CAP II M, [L]
94 Link Control File, 83
Creating Sample User Modules for SUPER CAP II T, Link List File, 83
91
Linking, 215
Load Basic System Function, 139
[D] Loading End Menu, 164
Loading End Screen, 149
Determining the Cause of the No–space State, 120
Loading Menu, 163
Developing a User Module, 88
Loading Screen, 148
Development Environment, 86
Loading Start Menu, 163
Loading Start Screen, 147
Loading to Flash ROM Module, 217
[E]
End of Boot System, 114
Equipment Configuration, 5 [M]
Error Messages and Required Actions, 115, 140
Macro Compiler
Executing the User Program, 89 (MCOMP0/MCOMP15/MCOMP15i), 14
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
i–1
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index B–66102E/10

Macro Converter (MCONV), 81 Registering a ROM–format File, Stored on a ROM


Cassette, into F–ROM, 184
Macro Converter (MCONV) Operation Guide for the
FANUC Series 16/18 Super Cap M/Super Cap II M, Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Mod-
79 ule, 89
Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules, 88 Restrictions Imposed on the System, 90
Macro Linker (MLINK), 17 Rom Write/Verification Parameter Table, 56
Macro Program Input, 24 ROM–Format File Transmitter (CNC) (For Series
16/18/20/21T–A), 21
Macro Program Output, 24
ROM–Format File Transmitter (FANUC FA Writer,
Memory Card File Delete Screen, 112, 137 GP–IB Interface) (for Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A),
Memory Card Format Function, 113, 138 25
Memory Card Specifications and Restrictions, 175 ROM–Format File Transmitter (FANUC PMC Writer/
FANUC FA Writer) (for Series 0, 15–A, 16–A,
Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory, 18–A), 23
167
RS–232–C Interface Setting, 33
Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM
Memory, 166

[S]
[N] Saving a Mem–format File from F–ROM to a
Memory Card, 182
Name of Macro Library, 188 Screen Configuration and Operating Procedure, 125
Notes, 155, 168 Selecting a RS–232–C/GPIB Interface Control System
(MDEV), 12
Serial Interface Utility, 24
[O] Series 15i Compile Parameters, 192
Operation, 81 Setting a Macro Password (Series 20), 118
Operation and Corresponding Screens, 100 Setting a Password, 119
Overview, 123 Source File, 81
Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System,
119
Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination
[P] (MTMP), 12
P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series Specifying Environment Variables, 12
16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A), 143
SRAM Data Backup Screen, 110, 134
P–code Loader Function (for Series 20), 160
Starting the Boot System, 98, 123, 176
Parameter, 156, 169
Starting the P-code Loader Function, 145
Parameters, 191
Super CAP T/Super CAP II T Loading to Flash ROM,
Parameters Other than Series 15i, 203 212
Password, 118 Symbolic Macro Program, 27
Path Setting, 10 System Common Symbol Definition
Processing by P–code Loader Function, 145 (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF), 39
System Common Symbol Definition File, 35
Processing Flow for the P–code Loader Function, 162
System Data Check Screen, 104, 129
System Data Delete Screen, 106, 131
[R] System Data Loading Screen, 101, 126
System Data Save Screen, 108
RAM Initialization Screen, 146
System File and User File, 99
RAM Initializing Menu, 162
System Files and User Files, 124
Registering a Mem–format File, Stored on a Memory
Card, into F–rom, 178 System Installation (Setup), 6, 213
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
i–2
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
B–66102E/10 Index

[U]
User Modules, 88
[T]
Table Conversion List File, 82
Table Data File, 82
Transferring the User Module to F–ROM, 89 [W]
Types of Files in F–ROM, 187 Write to the Memory Card, 216

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
i–3
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Revision Record

FANUC MACRO COMPILER(For Personal Computer) PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B–66102E)

• Addition of Series 21–MB.


• Addition of APPENDIX 11 BOOT SYSTEM (For Series
05 Jul., 1995 10 Jul., 2001 Addition of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL B
15–B).
• Correction of errors.

• Addition of Series 21–TB


04 Jan., 1995 • Addition of APPENDIX 10 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT WITH 09 Jul., 2000 Addition of Series 0i–MODEL A
MEMORY CARDS (SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION only
for Series 21–TB).

www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
03 Mar., 1994 Addition of Series 16–B. 08 Sep., 1999 Addition of Series 15i–MODEL A

Addition of Series 18.


02 Mar., 1993 07 Jul., 1997 Addition of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL A
Addition of Series 20.

The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
01 Jul., 1991 06 Jan., 1997 Addition of Series 16/18/160/180–MODEL C.

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents


www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
FANUC LTD

Printed in Japan
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete